JP6810464B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

There are gaming machines equipped with a control device capable of efficiently visually inspecting a substrate such as a control substrate.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-95879

In a visual inspection of a board such as a control board, confirmation of the control board may be required.
On one side, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a substrate such as a control substrate can be easily confirmed.

In order to achieve the above object, a game machine as shown below is provided. Gaming machine is provided with a first surface and a back surface side to become the second surface and capable of forming a conductive pattern on a base plate of the first surface. Board the information display area formed by the solid vent conductor pattern in a predetermined area of the first surface is provided, the first regions each having at least the substrate board information can be displayed a size relating to the information display area And the second region are divided into two, the first region is formed as an information display portion for displaying substrate information by a conductor pattern , the second region is formed as an information non-display portion without a conductor pattern, and the second surface is formed. A solid part of the conductor pattern is provided at a position corresponding to the information display area .

According to one aspect, it is easy to confirm a substrate such as a control substrate in the game machine.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the winning number counter area of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 1 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure hold information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 of the first embodiment is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. FIG. 2 of the first embodiment is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the variation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the variation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control device of 2nd Embodiment, and the mounting base which supports a game control device by a front frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the AA cross section of the game control device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the direction of the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the direction | direction of the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure (No. 3) which shows an example of the direction | direction of the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the orientation of the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and the resistance mounted on the game control board. FIG. 5 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display of the resistor mounted on the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and the corresponding part number. It is a figure which shows an example of the component provided on the component mounting surface of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the orientation of the game control board of the modification 1 of the 2nd Embodiment, and the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control device of the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment, and the mounting base which supports a game control device by a front frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the direction of the game control board of the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the orientation of the game control board of the modification 3 of the 2nd Embodiment, and the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement relation of the integrated circuit, the connector, and a resistor on the game control board of 3rd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistor mounted on the game control board. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the line TL of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the component arrangement area and the non-component arrangement area located between the integrated circuit and the connector on the game control board of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the AA cross section of the game control device of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the part number display of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the part number display of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state display device which is a display means of a base, and the storage area for a base. It is a figure which shows the display example by a state display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 1 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 3 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 4 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of the modification 4 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 5 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of the modification 6 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 7 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 8 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 8 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of the modification 8 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 9 of the 4th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example,). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an option setting unit 25 in which the player sets various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the game machine 10 intervenes the operation of the player based on the operation of the player received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. Can be done. For example, the effect in which the operation of the player is intervened includes the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the game machine 10 is the display device. The character displayed on the 41 can be operated, and the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal drawing start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 38 described later. The winning opening 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, a normal variable winning device 37 (a normal variable winning device 37) which is located below the normal figure start gate 34 and which gives a start condition of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) to the right part of the center case 40. The first start winning opening, starting winning area) is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 (starting port 1) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right to facilitate the inflow of the game ball. The 37b is always in a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side falls to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (general electric).

A flow path 91 through which the game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game ball that has not won the normal variable winning device 37 flows downward through the flow down path 91. A start winning opening 92 is provided in the lower part of the flow path 91, and a guide portion 93 is provided below the flow path 91. The guide portion 93 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 94 descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 catches a game ball that flows downward without winning a prize in the starting winning opening 92, and a special variable winning device 38 described later is present on the left. It is designed to guide you toward you.

The start winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game), and the starting winning opening 92 (starting opening 2) is used. The winning game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the start winning opening 36 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (lower large winning opening, large winning) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. Mouth 1) 95 is arranged. The special variable winning device 95 has an opening / closing member 95c, and the opening / closing member 95c closes the large winning opening depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game (a closed state disadvantageous to the player). The opening / closing member 95c converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. That is, the special variable winning device 95 includes a large winning opening 1 solenoid 95b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and a large winning opening (lower large winning opening, large winning opening 1) opened and closed by an opening / closing member 95c. , Special figure 1 During the small hit game state (second special game state) according to the result of the variable display game, the inflow of the game ball into the large prize opening is made by converting the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state. It is designed to facilitate and give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (upper grand prize opening, grand winning) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. Mouth 2) 38 is arranged. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is closed in a closed state (disadvantageous for the player) depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 38c retracts from the closed state) and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening 2 as a driving device, which is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c driven by a solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) (upper large winning opening, large winning opening 2). , During the big hit game state (first special game state) based on the results of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the small hit game state (second special game state) based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Inside, by converting the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. ing. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

When there are a plurality of large winning openings as in the present embodiment, the large winning opening switches 38a are provided with one or two of each, x as a whole (see FIG. 3). In the case of the first embodiment, the special variable winning device 95 forming the first special variable winning device (lower large winning opening, large winning opening 1) is provided with only one large winning opening switch 38a. On the other hand, the special variable winning device 38 forming the second special variable winning device (upper large winning opening, large winning opening 2) is provided with a plurality (for example, two) of large winning opening switches 38a. Further, the special variable winning device 95 is, for example, a winning device (so-called mini-attacker) having a smaller large winning opening than the special variable winning device 38.

Further, a warp opening (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b can easily win the starting winning opening 36.

In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game ball flows down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the starting winning opening 36, the special variable winning device 95, and the general winning opening 35 (right of the special variable winning device 38) are launched. You can aim to win a prize in the general prize opening 35 in the department), and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable prize device 37, and the special variable prize It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38 or the like.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a normal drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the game machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. The CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110, the input unit 120 having an input port, the output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 are connected to each other. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like that generate a clock. A predetermined level of direct current voltage such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100. To be operational.

The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and the like. The normal power supply unit 410 having the It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , May be configured to be provided on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or power failure. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to the setting of 6 steps.

The game control device 100 transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to cyclically change settings 1 to 6 by detecting a pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LED mounted on a substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 shifts the control state to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the game machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state that has become the identification information, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variablely displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generates and outputs a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in the variation display without reach and reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time saving operating state), the number of start memories, etc., and one of the variable pattern tables is selected from the plurality of variable pattern tables. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, and the like, and is a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the game machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. It controls to drive the prize ball and pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the game machine 10, and controls for paying out the ball lending. ..

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a start port 1 switch 36a in the start winning port 36, a start port 1 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, a start port 2 switch 92a in the start winning port 92, and a general drawing. It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided to which a signal is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine 10 is also input to the proximity I / F 121. Further, in the proximity I / F121, since the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and output an abnormality detection signal.

Explaining the winning opening switch 35a, although the winning opening switch 35a is shown by one block in FIG. 3, a plurality of (N) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are actually used. Is provided on the game board 30, and each signal is input to the proximity I / F 121 with different signal lines. Further, in FIG. 3, the large winning opening switches 38a are shown by one block, but in reality, a plurality of (X) large winning opening switches 38a (three in the present embodiment) are provided on the game board 30. Has been done. Then, these plurality of large winning opening switches 38a are connected by different signal lines, or are wired or on a relay board (not shown) existing between the switch and the game control device 100 (main board), for example. It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR). The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are the second input port 123. Is entered in. The signal outputs (outputs from the proximity I / F 121) of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the start port switches in FIG. 1, are shown by one signal line in FIG. 3, but are actually shown. There are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of setting value change switch 126, detection signal of setting key switch 127, RAM initial The detection signal of the switch 112 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111 (to the effective level). It can be read out by changing). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the original signal) and the out-ball detection switch signal (the signal output when the out-ball is detected) and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

The out-ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out-sensor each time the out-sensor (not shown) detects one out-ball of the game machine 10. For example, the out-ball detection switch signal is provided in the discharge flow path (not shown) between the discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out-ball) from the game machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is used to calculate the game performance (for example, base) per predetermined operation (for example, 60,000 out-balls), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the state display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300. In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determining the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to the game effect or the customer waiting screen display. For example, the status display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the game performance in decimal or hexadecimal numbers.

Further, the game machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set just before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of a certification body (not shown) connected to the data bus 140, a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. An error signal indicating that the control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus. It has become like.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. The first output port 134a for outputting the opening / closing data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening / closing and the display data of the status display device 135 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability set value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 134c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 134d is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 134e for outputting information related to the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10. Can be supplied to an external device via a photo relay. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c. External information signals supplied from the third driver 138c, the fifth output port 134e, and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d to output and a fifth driver 138e to generate and output a drive signal of the state display device 135 by receiving the display data signal of the state display device 135 output from the first output port 134a are provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Further, the status display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the status display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 490. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 are used. Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and can hold stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A Fe RAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command (effect command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, and decorates the lamp. Lights up, controls the drive of motors and solenoids, manages the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 is connected to an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. Has been done.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for the purpose are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 that drive and control a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30, and a board provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. Good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 for main control. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a detection signal to the microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and the control circuit 332-334 (IO RESET signal) that drives and controls lamps, motors, and the like. And put them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

In addition, fraud prevention measures may be taken by making the settings in the game machine 10 as follows.
(1) The game control device 100 executes a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 when the setting is changed. As a result, the game machine 10 prevents the game control from being performed over different set values.

(2) The game control device 100 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 when the setting is changed and when the setting is confirmed. As a result, the game machine 10 can notify the externally connected device (for example, a hall computer, an information disclosure device such as a ring lamp) that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. The externally connected device that has input the security signal can notify that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed by means of a notification means (lamp, sound (including voice), etc.). The game control device 100 may output a common security signal for setting change and setting confirmation, or may output a security signal that can distinguish between setting change and setting confirmation.

(3) The game control device 100 is housed in a board box and attached to the back surface side of the front frame 12. The game control device 100 is protected by a sealed board box except that the required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), various connectors, and the like face the outside. As a result, the main medium (game microcomputer 111, etc.) that triggers the transition of setting change or setting confirmation is protected by the sealed substrate box. Further, in the game control device 100, the setting key switch 127 is faced to the outside, and the required operation units (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) other than the setting key switch 127 are sealed by a board box. It may be something to protect.

(4) The game control device 100 does not have a setting key by requiring the operation of the setting key switch 127 to access the main medium (game microcomputer 111, etc.) that triggers the transition of setting change or setting confirmation. Eliminate access to third-party main media. The game control device 100 may be configured to enable access to a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, set value change switch 126) by operating the setting key switch 127. For example, the game control device 100 may be configured to enable physical operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 (for example, opening / closing the operation window) by operating the setting key switch 127, or may be set. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the set value change switch 126 may be electrically or logically enabled by the operation of the key switch 127, or a combination thereof may be used.

(5) The game control device 100 includes a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, set value change switch 126, setting key switch 127) and a required information display unit (status display device 135, probability setting value display device 136). Is controlled by the gaming microcomputer 111. The game control device 100 may include an error release switch used for error release and a game start switch that gives a game start trigger, and the error release switch and the game start switch are also controlled by the game microcomputer 111. It may be.

(6) The game control device 100 determines four power-on states from the combination of the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the game control device 100 is in a setting change state in which the set value can be changed, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is set to the setting confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed. Is set to the RAM clear (RWM clear) state for forcibly initializing, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the power is turned on to the power failure recovery (recovery) state.

(7) The game machine 10 can change the setting in the following steps in the setting change state. The setting key switch 127 is turned off when the power is off, and the setting key is inserted (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the ON state (step 2). By turning on the power (power switch ON) while pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (ON), the setting is changed (step 3). In the setting change state, the setting value is changed each time the setting value change switch 126 is pressed (step 4). By operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state, the set value is confirmed and the setting change state is terminated (step 5).

At this time, the setting change is notified in steps 3 and 4 by the notification means (for example, the display by the display device 41, the sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46). At 5, the RAM clear is notified. Further, the external information output means (for example, the external information terminal plate 71) outputs the security signal in steps 3 and 4, and stops the output of the security signal in step 5. The game control device 100 executes RAM clear in step 3 prior to the RAM clear notification in step 5. That is, the game control device 100 gives priority to the setting change notification over the RAM clear notification, thereby promptly performing the setting value change notification and improving the effect as a fraud prevention measure. Further, the probability set value display device 136 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in steps 3 and 4, and turns off in step 5. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 4, and the base value is displayed in step 5. The game machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 integrally. For example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability set value display device 136. In that case, the status display device 135 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in steps 3 and 4, and displays the base value in step 5. The game state of the game control device 100 is before the start of the game in steps 3 and 4, the game starts in step 5, and the game is in progress thereafter.

(8) The game machine 10 can confirm the setting in the following steps in the setting confirmation state. The setting key switch 127 is turned off when the power is off, and the setting key is inserted (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the ON state (step 2). By turning on the power (power switch ON) without pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (OFF), the setting confirmation state is entered (step 3). The setting confirmation state is ended by operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state (step 4).

At this time, the setting confirmation is notified in step 3 by the notification means (for example, the display by the display device 41, the sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46). Further, the external information output means (for example, the external information terminal plate 71) outputs the security signal in step 3, and stops the output of the security signal in step 4. Further, the probability set value display device 136 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and turns off in step 4. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 3 and displays the base value in step 4. The game machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 integrally. For example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability set value display device 136. In that case, the status display device 135 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and displays the base value in step 4. The game state of the game control device 100 is before the start of the game in step 3, the game starts in step 4, and the game is in progress thereafter.

The game machine 10 is designed so that the setting can be changed and the setting can be confirmed only before the game starts when the power is turned on. As a result, the game machine 10 eliminates setting changes and setting confirmations during the game, and facilitates operation guarantee during the game.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol symbol display unit 55 of the batch display device 50, a process of displaying a normal symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal figure variation display game is out of sync, the normal figure symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37. , A process of extracting a random value for jackpot determination of the first special figure variation display game based on this start memory, comparing it with a determination value stored in ROM 111B, and determining a hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game. To do. In addition, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 92a provided in the start winning opening 92, and based on this start memory, the jackpot determination disturbance of the second special figure variation display game The numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. To do. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, starting winning opening 92) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. It serves as a game control means.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special game state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, a special variation winning device by the large winning opening 2 solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the 38 is opened, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening 2. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A either wins a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls in the large winning opening 2, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening 2. One round is to open the large winning opening 2 until the condition is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of rounds. Further, in the process of generating the small hit game state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) being a small hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, the large winning opening 1 solenoid 95b. The opening / closing member 95c of the special variable winning device 95 is opened to control the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening 1. Further, in the process of generating the small hit game state due to the result of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) being a small hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, the large winning opening 2 solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 is opened to control the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening 2. The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the large winning opening performed in these small hit game states is, for example, an operation of maintaining the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec four times at 1500 msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A controls the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second stop symbol, opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2) of the third stop symbol 3 times), it is possible to set.

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power opening number, and the normal power opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, 2 times) is obtained for one hit result of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal figure, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states with different changes. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. In addition, the time saving state can also be referred to as a general electric support state (during general electric support or electric support).

Further, in the case of the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game control device 100 receives the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation) after the end of the time saving state generated by the predetermined jackpot (after the end of the electric support). It is possible to generate a special figure 2 special mode (a specific result high probability state that increases the probability that the second special figure variable display game will be a specific result) that increases the probability that the result of the display game) will be a small hit, for example, by a specified period. There is. This special figure 2 special mode is a kind of high probability state.

Next, the outline of the game property (standard strategy) of the game machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. The game nature of the game machine 10 is that in the normal game state (a state that is neither the special figure 2 special mode, the special game state, or the time saving state described above), a left-handed hit is made and a big hit is made in the special figure 1 variable display game. Aim, hit right in the special game state (big hit state) or time saving state (during electric support), and aim for the small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game by hitting right in the special figure 2 special mode, special game state or time saving state And special figure 2 When the special mode ends and the normal game state is reached, the game returns to left-handed. In addition, by providing the above-mentioned special figure 2 special mode, there is a possibility that the player can play the game while maintaining a higher expectation than the normal game state even after the end of the time saving state, and the interest of the game is improved. To do.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The batch display device 50 displays various states according to the lighting modes of the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LEDs_d3 to LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 allocates various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the normal symbol symbol display unit 55, the normal figure hold display unit 56, the state display unit 57, and the special figure 2 hold display unit 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d6. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbol in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d1. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game according to the lighting modes of the three LEDs, LED_d7, LED_d9, and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a game machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 8 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and the process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the data held in the RAM area. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on until the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Next, after performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). To do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the game machine 10 is waited to be cut off. .. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S11), and the timer value is "0". It is determined whether or not it is (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time ends, access permission of RWM (Read Write Memory) such as RAM111C or EEPROM that can be read and written is granted (step). S13), off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16).

Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17) If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum is combined with the calculated checksum. It is determined whether or not the checksums at the time of power failure match (step S19).

Here, in the checksum calculation process performed in step S18 and step S43 described later, the sum of the data of the game control work area and the data of the status display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the game control may be performed. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the work area for game and the data of the work area for status display, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the work area for game control. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, when the checksums match (step S19; Y), it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 read earlier whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on (step S20), and the RAM When the initialization switch 112 is off (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), and processing is performed when the normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or if the checksum is determined to be abnormal (step S19; N), the step. The process proceeds to S21, and in steps S21 to S24, initialization processing (first initialization processing) when a data abnormality occurs is performed. That is, the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RWM (data in all areas including the access prohibited area) based on the determination that the data in the RWM (for example, RAM 111C) is abnormal. It serves as the first initialization means.

Then, when the process proceeds to step S21, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permission (step S21), and all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are cleared to zero (step S22). ), Set the RAM access prohibited area to access prohibited (step S23). Next, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S24), and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area in which a value other than the value (zero) written in step S22 of the game control work area and the state display work area is used as the initial value, and in the present embodiment This is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demo and the setting of the production mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), and the initialization process at the time of the initialization operation in steps S27 and S28 (the first). 2 Initialization process) is performed. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 has data stored in the RWM (for example, RAM 111C) based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (for example, RAM 111C). It serves as a second initialization means for initializing (data in an area that does not include an access prohibited area).

Then, when the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), the data in the game control work area in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM111C) is cleared to zero (step S27). , The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demo and the setting of the effect mode in the present embodiment.

As described above, the game control device 100 of the first embodiment includes an initialization process at the time of data abnormality (first initialization process) and an initialization process at the time of initialization operation (second initialization process). Since it has a function (first initialization means, second initialization means) to distinguish and execute the above, it is possible to realize the optimum and lean initialization processing according to the situation.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S25), and the special figure status (set to the special figure status area described later) is set. The command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the state indicated by the data) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S26), and the process proceeds to step S31.

Here, the area to be initialized in step S25 is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In step S25, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is an indefinite state indicating that. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in step S26, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The screen-designated commands are the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which are usually being processed (during fluctuation, during big hit (first special game state), during small hit (first). In the case of (2) a state that is neither of the special game states), it is a command to command the display of the customer waiting demo screen, and in other cases, it is a command to command the display of the recovery screen.

On the other hand, when the process shifts from step S24 or S28 to step S29, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S29), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined value is set. A plurality of commands such as time (for example, a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal, and a timer interrupt signal. It includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that defines how to replace the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition). is there. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value random number, small). After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of the hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34).

Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit stop of the special symbol. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (small hit symbol random number) that determines the symbol. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" determines the hit symbol of the normal figure fluctuation game. It is a random number that is the initial value of a random number (hit symbol random number). It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model.

Further, in the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, since the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value of various initial value random numbers ( By setting the start value), the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuously updating the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main process.

Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are the program's. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as timer interrupt processing, which is a processing unit. In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the above random numbers may be a counter-type update by "+1" or "-1", or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number update process in step S35 also includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, both of them are used. In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), it waits for the power of the game machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a subordinate control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. Etc.), the main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control). The device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs between the time when the interrupt is enabled and the time when the interrupt is disabled (steps S34 to S39) in the above-mentioned main process. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S121). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal capture, that is, input processing (step S123) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing (step S124) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening 1 solenoid 95b, large winning opening 2 solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c). ). When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device 200. Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step S125), the random number update process 1 (step S126), and the random number update process 2 (step S127) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. .. Further, the random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.

After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, 37a, the starting port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and error The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. Further, a start port switch monitoring process (step S129) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a, and a special figure 1 game process (step S130a) for performing a process related to the special figure 1 variation display game. Special Figure 2 Performs processing related to the variable display game Special Figure 2 game processing (step S130b) and normal drawing game processing (step S130c) that performs processing related to the normal figure variable display game.

In the start port switch monitoring process, if there is a game ball winning in the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the first starting winning opening, or the starting winning opening 92 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers are generated. (Big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result is preliminarily determined based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, a segment LED (for example, an LED of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the batch display device 50) provided on the game machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game is desired. From the segment LED editing process (step S131) that drives to display, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio wave sensor 62. The panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133), which checks the detection signal of the above and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, is performed. Then, the external information editing process (step S134) for setting the signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and the status display editing output process (step S135) for displaying the status are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission process of the first embodiment. Further, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a structural example of the winning number counter area of the first embodiment.

First, an example of the winning number counter area will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, for example, the winning number counter area 1 is composed of 3 prize ball counters, 10 prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters, respectively. The prize number counter can store up to 65535 prizes. Next, as shown in FIG. 10, the prize number counter area 2 includes 3 prize ball counters, 10 prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters, and each prize number counter can store up to 255 prizes. It has become. In checking the count number of the prize number counter area, the above-mentioned counters are checked in order from the top (from the three prize ball counters) by updating the address of the prize number counter area in step S202 or the like described later.

Next, in FIG. 9, the left column is a process of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is a process of transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described with reference to FIG. 10, the counters of the plurality of prize number counter areas 2 provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Among them, it is determined whether or not the counter to be checked has a count number other than "0" (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the check of the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 is completed. Whether or not it is determined (step S203).

If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the counter in the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted (updated to "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter. The number of payouts corresponding to the address of the area 2 (for example, any one of the above-mentioned 3, 10, and 14) is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If the subtraction result is determined to be "0" or more (step S209; Y) in step S209, the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (Step S211).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, a process of outputting the main prize ball signal is performed based on the number of times the main prize ball signal is output updated in step S210. Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 scheduled payouts, and 10 pieces are paid out from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output for each.

Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated to "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the final step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. Therefore, the subtraction will not be performed.

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) are "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave fraud". "Medium", "Abnormality of payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor payout balls)", "Payout insufficient error", "Payout excess error", "Prize to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the remaining number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215), and the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 is determined. If there is no count in (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated to "-1" (step S218) to the address of the winning number counter area 1. The corresponding payout number command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), and in step S214, it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). , When it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas is completed (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, this payout command transmission process is terminated.

As can be seen from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing step S215 or later depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses. I have sent it since then. Further, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 8) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, the count switch) corresponding to the two large winning opening switches 38a (count switch) in the upper large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) Data indicating the number of the port into which the detection signal from is input, the bit position in the port of the signal, and the like are stored) (step S271). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S272) is executed to monitor whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) to win the grand prize even though the grand prize opening is not open and to detect a normal winning. ..

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to one large winning opening switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (special variable winning device 95) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored for illegal winning and normal. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S274) for detecting the winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in the Fuden is prepared (step S275a), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S275a) is performed to monitor for illegal winning and detect normal winning. Step S275b) is executed.

Next, the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring processing, that is, the winning opening switch that can always win (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is monitored. The table is prepared (step S276), the winning number counter update process (step S277) for updating the winning number is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process (step S278) is further performed.

Next, the value of the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals for which the error status of the game machine 10 should be monitored is to be monitored this time is set to "0". To update in the range of "3" (step S279). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any of the switch error 1 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout error error. The game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring of errors based on the crab is prepared (step S280). Then, the game machine state check process (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a game machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud, and the touch switch according to the value of the status scan counter. (Step S282). Then, a game machine state check process (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284), and if the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring End the process. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the game machine state in the game machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the game machine state based on the switch error 2 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the state scan counter. The game machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the above is prepared (step S285). Then, the game machine state check process (step S286) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is completed. Note that the payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring is performed in a 16 ms cycle.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S129) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the winning monitoring table of the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the starting port switch monitoring process. It is determined whether or not there is a prize in 1 (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the starting opening 1 (step A103; Y), the game state is a predetermined state in which the game state should be right-handed (for example, a normal electric support state, a big hit, etc.). It is determined whether or not there is (step A104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the state is not a predetermined state to be right-handed (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the state should be right-handed (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. To do. That is, in the case of the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, except for the normal electric support state, the starting port 1 is hardly won unless it is left-handed, and the starting port 1 is won in the predetermined state where it should be right-handed. In this case, since it can be estimated that the player has hit the left side even though the state should be right-handed, the right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit the right side. It is configured to be done by.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 (step A107), the special figure start port 1 switch process (step A108) is performed.
Next, the winning monitoring table of the starting port 2 (starting winning opening 92) is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting port 2 (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that the starting port 2 has won a prize (step A111; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is the normal electric support state (time saving state) (step). If it is determined that the A112) is not in the normal power support state (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (step A113). Further, in step A113, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game is in the final variation of the normal electric support (step A114).

If it is determined in step A114 that the final fluctuation of the normal power support is not in progress (step A114; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and an effect command setting process (step A116) is performed. That is, if it is not in the normal power support state, the big hit, or the final fluctuation of the normal power support, it should be left-handed, so the process of transmitting the left-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

Then, when it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric support state is in (step A112; Y), and when it is determined in step A113 that the jackpot is in progress (step A113; Y), the general electric support is final in step A114. If it is determined that the fluctuation is in progress (step A114; Y), and if the process of step A116 is completed, the process proceeds to step A117.

When the process proceeds to step A117, after preparing a table for setting the information held by the start port 2 (step A117), the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A118) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process.

If it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the start port 2, for example, before executing step A112, it is normal for the public electric machine to be illegal (even though the normal variable prize device 37 is closed). A step is provided to determine whether or not there is an illegality in which a prize is detected in the variable winning device 37), and if it is determined that this general electric power illegality is occurring, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 and subsequent steps. It may be configured so that the second start memory (start memory of special figure 2) is not generated any more when there is an illegality of the electric power.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, of the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) and starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92), the non-winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set ( Step A121), among the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step). A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A125). Then, among the start port 1 and the start port 2, the winning information of the start port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port 1 switch process (step A108) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start port 1 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 1 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the start port signal 1 output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored is output to the external management device of the game machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the number of output times overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), step A134 is passed and the process proceeds to step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 1 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 hold items (number of start memory of special figure 1) of the update target corresponding to the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a of the monitoring target is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4). (Step A135). If the number of special figure 1 hold items to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port 1 switch process is terminated. When the number of special figures 1 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting look-ahead fluctuation patterns) (step A135; Y). Step A136), the number of special figures 1 held to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A137).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A142), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. The variation pattern of the corresponding RWM is saved in the random number storage area (step A143), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A144) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number to be monitored is prepared (step A145), the effect command setting process (step A146) is performed, and the special figure start port 1 switch process is completed. ..

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and the special figure variation display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing up to a predetermined number as a starting memory that is the execution right of. Further, the start winning prize storage means (RAM111C) first starts various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) up to a predetermined number. Remember as a memory.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A118) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 2 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 2 switch processing, first, the start port signal 2 output number of times, which is the number of times to output information on the number of times of winning to the start port 2 switch 92a to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded ( Step A151), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A152), and it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step A153). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 2 output count area of the RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), the process passes through step A154 and proceeds to the process of step A155. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 2 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 hold (starting memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4) (step A155). When the number of special figure 2 hold items to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A155; N), the special figure start port 2 switch process is terminated. When the number of special figures 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A155; Y), the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting look-ahead fluctuation patterns) is set ( In step A156), the number of special figures 2 held to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A157).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 2 is calculated (step A158), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A159). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of special figure 2 is extracted, prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A161).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A162), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. It is saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A163), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A164) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step A165), the effect command setting process (step A166) is performed, and the special figure start port 2 switch process is completed. ..

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the start winning opening 92, and becomes the right to execute the special figure variation display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing a predetermined number as a memory up to a predetermined number. Further, the start winning prize storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 2 (start winning opening 92) as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A144, step A164) in the special figure start port 1 switch process and the special figure start port 2 switch process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process in which the result-related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (high probability medium) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that the probability is high (step A172; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A172 that the probability is not high (step A172; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (step A173). If it is determined in step A173 that the jackpot is in progress (step A173; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A173 that the jackpot is not in progress (step A173; N), the jackpot determination process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A173; N). Step A174) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A175). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A175; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) is displayed. It is set (step A176), the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 is acquired (step A177), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), the small hit determination process (step A179) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do it. After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A180). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A180; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A183), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set, and the small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162 is set. Is set (step A182), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A184, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in any one of step A177, step A182, or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A185). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A186) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. To do.

After that, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern (variation pattern until the start of the reach action) and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern (variation pattern after the start of the reach action) in the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. A command is prepared (step A188), an effect command setting process (step A189) is performed, and the special figure reservation information determination process is completed.

The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing (special figure 1 normal processing or special figure 2 normal processing described later). It is the same as the processing. That is, when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A144, since the special figure type is special figure 1, the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 1 information setting process and the special figure 1 variation described later. It is the same as the pattern setting process, and when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2, so the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 2 information described later. It is the same as the setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the pre-reading stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory can be obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (step S130a) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game processing, the input of the large winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 1 (identification information that is variablely displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game) is displayed. Set up. In the special figure 1 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the big hit or the small hit (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game) (step A1). .. When the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step A1; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 and the special variable winning device 95 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress (step A1; Y) and the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3. Special figure 1 If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in the above is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game are set. Fig. 1 Setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations. Fig. 1 Performing normal processing (step A8).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1 are performed. 1 Perform the variable processing (step A9).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big hit of each big hit. Perform the special figure 1 display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. The fanfare / interval processing (step A11) to be performed is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening Perform the large winning opening opening processing (step A12), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set, while the final round is used. For example, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing. Do it.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the small hit middle processing are performed. Perform the small hit fanfare intermediate process (step A15) for setting the information necessary for the operation.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the small hit middle operation transition process, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit medium process (step A16) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and subsequent processing is performed. To do.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (step S130b) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game processing, the input of the large winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 2 (identification information that is variablely displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game) is displayed. Set up. In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is in the big hit or the small hit (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A31). .. When the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 is not performed (step A31; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 and the special variable winning device 95 is performed.

Next, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 is in progress (step A31; Y), and when the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, the process proceeds to step A33. , Special figure 2 If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A33). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A34). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step A35). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36), and special figure 2 in RWM. A timer value for length variation (for example, 60,000 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A35; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branching referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. A table is set in a register (step A38), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step A39). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A47).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are set. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Performing normal processing (step A48).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step A49).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big hit of each big hit. Perform the special figure 2 display processing (step A50) for setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A51).

In step A47, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A52), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set while the final round is used. For example, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening (step A53) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit end processing. Do it.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step A54) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the small hit middle processing are performed. Perform the small hit fanfare intermediate process (step A55) to set the information necessary for the operation.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the small hit middle operation transition process, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit medium processing (step A56) is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A57) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end processing is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step A58) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A60) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A34, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A34; N), that is, when the time is not up or when the processing of step A37 is completed, step A59 Move to processing and perform subsequent processing.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special drawing 1 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start the fluctuation (that is, whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A251). In this determination, the game state is the period from the end of the fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 2 (start of the process during display of the special figure 2) to the end of the hit operation (big hit game state or small hit game state). In the case of the above state, that is, when the special figure 2 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not the above period, the special figure 1 determines that the fluctuation can be started.

Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 can start the fluctuation (step A251; Y), whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (that is, the left-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and then the right-handed instruction is given. It is determined (whether or not the notification command has not been transmitted) (step A252). In step A252, if the left-handed instruction notification flag is set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, and if the left-handed instruction notification flag is not set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed. It may be configured.

If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step A252; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A253), the effect command setting process (step A254) is performed, and the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step). A255).

When the left-handed instruction has been notified (step A252; Y) and when step A255 is completed, the process proceeds to step A256, and whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is "0". Whether or not it is determined (step A256). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" (step A256; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure fluctuation display game is prepared (step A257), and an effect command is created. The setting process (step A258) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A260), and the effect command setting process (step A260) is performed. Perform A261) and set (add information) the information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 change display game is being executed) in the special figure status area in the RWM (step A262), and the probability of the special figure change display game. It is determined whether or not the state is in high probability (step A263).

In the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) and the information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) are provided. Each area is stored independently, and the state indicated by the information set in this special figure status area is the special figure status. When step A262 is executed, the special figure status becomes one of "special figure 1 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing".

Further, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259), a process of saving the process number “1” related to the special figure 1 changing process in the special figure 1 game process number area (steps A318 and A319 described later). A process of saving the changing flag in the fluctuation control flag area of the special figure 1 (step A322 described later), a process of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the game processing timer of the special figure 1 (steps A307 and A497 described later), and the like are performed. ..

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264; N), it is special. FIG. 1 The fluctuation check flag is set (step A265). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress is performed by the high probability final fluctuation flag described later. That is, if the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress.

Then, when step A265 is completed, when it is determined that the probability is high (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that the final fluctuation is high probability (step A264; Y), the special figure 1 Process during fluctuation The transition setting process (step A266) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start fluctuation (step A251; N) and when the special figure 1 hold number is "0" in step A256 (step A256; Y), the processing numbers are set. “0” is set (step A267), the processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special drawing 1 game processing number in the RWM (step A268), and the special drawing 1 game processing number is stored. 1 Normally end the process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of step A251 is positive and the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0", the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) and the like are executed. , Even if the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed), the special figure 1 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory is displayed as a variable display based on the second start memory. It is a control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (step A48) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special FIG. 2 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start the fluctuation (that is, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A271). In this determination, the game state is the period from the end of the fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 1 (the start of the process during display of the special figure 1) to the end of the hit operation (the big hit game state or the small hit game state). In the case of the above state, that is, when the special figure 1 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not the above period, the special figure 2 determines that the fluctuation can be started.

Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 can start the fluctuation (step A271; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A272). .. Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" (step A272; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure fluctuation display game is prepared (step A273), and an effect command is created. The setting process (step A274) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) is performed, and the information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed) is set in the special figure status area in the RWM. (Information addition) (step A276), and it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A277).

Here, the states indicated by the information set in the special figure status area (that is, the special figure status) are "special figure 2 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing" when step A276 is executed. It becomes one of the states.

Further, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275), a process of saving "1", which is a process number related to the special figure 2 changing process, in the special figure 2 game process number area (steps A348 and A349 described later). A process of saving the changing flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352 described later), a process of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (steps A337 and A497 described later), and the like are performed. ..

Note that, for example, after step A275 is executed, a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared, then an effect command setting process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step A276 (that is, special figure 2). Also, in the usual processing, the decoration special figure hold number command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A277; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278; N), it is special. FIG. 2 The fluctuation check flag is set (step A279).

Then, when step A279 is completed, when it is determined that the probability is high (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that the final fluctuation is high probability (step A278; Y), the special figure 2 Process during fluctuation The transition setting process (step A280) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A272; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number is "0" (step A281), and the special figure 1 hold number is If it is determined to be "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (step A282). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step A282; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (step A283), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (step A283; N). ) Sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and the effect command setting process (step A286) is performed. When the effect command setting process is performed, the prepared command (here, the customer waiting demo command) is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Then, when step A286 is completed, when it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start fluctuation (step A271; N), and when the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step A281; N), the special figure 1 is special. When FIG. 1 is changing (step A282; Y) and when the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283; Y), "0" is set as the processing number (step A287), and the RWM The processing number, that is, "0" is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special drawing 2 game processing number (step A288), and the special drawing 2 normal processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of step A271 is affirmative and the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) or the like is executed. , Even if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed), the special figure 2 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A259) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 21 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is set (step A301), and the first special figure change display game is started. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A302) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A303) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1. This is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set by performing the special figure 1 information setting process (step A304). Prepare the setting information table (step A305). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A306) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step A307) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A308).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309; N), it is special. It is determined whether or not FIG. 2 is changing (special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) (step A310). When the special figure 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A311). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312). FIG. 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not, for example, “4” or more (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set in the fluctuation start information setting process in step A337 described later when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a state of a time value (for example, 60,000 msec) sufficient within the 2-byte range. It is set to "0" (see, for example, step A500 below).

Further, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, in step A313, the result of multiplying the length variation timer value (for example, 60,000 ms) saved in step A37 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is multiplied by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer at that time. By adding the values in the timer area, the remaining fluctuation time in FIG. 2 can be calculated.

Further, when the timer value for long fluctuation is, for example, 60,000 msec (= 60 seconds), the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more, which means that the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is 240. It is more than a second (= 4 × 60 seconds), which is longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the special figure 1. In that case, it is not necessary to execute steps A315 and A316 described later, so a step to determine it. A312 is provided. Therefore, the numerical value "4" in step A312 is a numerical value for predetermining whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the special figure 1 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer. It's just one example.

Next, when step A313 is completed and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311; Y), the process proceeds to step A314, and special figure 1 to be started from now on. When the fluctuation time of (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A306) is the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 currently changing (calculation result of step A313 or the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is zero). Special figure 2 It is determined whether or not the time is shorter than the time determined by the value of the game processing timer (step A314).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; N), a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer is prepared (step A315). ), The effect command setting process (step A316) is performed.

Next, when the probability is high (step A308; Y), the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A309; Y), and the special figure 2 is not changing (step A310; N), the special figure 2 game. When the number of repetitions of the processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312; Y), the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 (step A314; Y), and step A316. When is completed, the process proceeds to step A317 (FIG. 22).

When the process proceeds to step A317, the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A317) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A318), and the special figure 1 game process number is stored in the RWM. The processing number, that is, "1" is saved in the game processing number area (step A319), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demo flag area in the RWM, is cleared (step A320). After that, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A321), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (step A321). Step A322), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the symbol display unit 53 of the special figure 1) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of the RWM (step A323), and specialize the RWM. FIG. 1 The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation (step A324), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 in step A324 is to start the change display of the special figure 1 from the blank symbol.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A275) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. 23 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure change display game is set. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A332) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2. This is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set by performing the special figure 2 information setting process (step A334). The setting information table is prepared (step A335). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step A337) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A338).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A338; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339; N), it is special. It is determined whether or not FIG. 1 is changing (special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is changing (step A340; Y), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 to be started from now on (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) of the special figure 1 which is currently changing. It is determined whether or not it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A344; N), a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer is prepared (step A345). ), The effect command setting process (step A346) is performed.

Next, when the probability is high (step A338; Y), the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A339; Y), and the special figure 1 is not changing (step A340; N), the special figure 2 When the fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of FIG. 1 (step A344; Y), and when step A346 is completed, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 24).

When the process proceeds to step A347, the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A347) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 is an area for storing the special figure 2 game process number in the RWM. The processing number, that is, "1" is saved in the game processing number area (step A349), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demo flag area in the RWM, is cleared (step A350). After that, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the signal during the change of the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (step A351). Step A352), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of blinking cycle of special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area of RWM (step A353), and specially of RWM. FIG. 2 The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to the blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation (step A354), and the special diagram 2 fluctuation start process is terminated. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 in step A354 is to start the change display of the special figure 2 from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A307 and A337) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. 25 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment. FIG. 26 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the variation start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491; Y), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 and the fluctuation pattern random number of the special figure 1 are being set. 2 and the information (for the holding ball 1) of the random number storage area (for the holding ball 1) of the variation pattern random number 3 are cleared (step A491a). When the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step A491; N), the information of the random number storage area of the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step). A491b).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the special figure game processing timer area for the added value (that is, the special figure 1 game processing timer area during the information setting of the special figure 1). While the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A497).

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A498), and when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A498; N), it is determined whether or not the long variation of the special figure 2 is started (step). In the case of A499), if it is not the start of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 (step A499; N), the "repeated number of times of the special figure 2 game processing timer is stored in the RWM)" 0 ”is saved (step A500).

On the other hand, when the long fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (step A499; Y), "9" is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A501). Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A498; Y), when the processes of steps A500 and A501 are completed, the process proceeds to step A502.

It should be noted that the number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set for the long variation of the special figure 2 in order to change the time that is insufficient for the 2-byte special figure game processing timer. Further, when, for example, 60000 ms is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A497 as the addition result of step A496, and "9" is saved as the number of repetitions in step A501, the timer interrupt processing (step A33 described above) The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is subtracted, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is subtracted by 1 in the step A36, and further, in the step A37, 60,000 ms is added to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. It is set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total variation time of FIG. 2 is 60,000 ms × 10 in this embodiment, which is a variation time of 10 minutes. Actually, since it is a timer interrupt of 4 ms, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, the case where it can be expressed by multiplication of 60 seconds is described as an example.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A502, the variation command data (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A502), and the variation command data (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A503). ), The effect command setting process is performed (step A504).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, the prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) are written to the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. As a result, the effect command consisting of the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. The same applies when the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte structure such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like the effect command, but a byte structure larger than that may be used. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multi-byte configuration may be used.

Next, when step A504 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A505), and if the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A505; Y), the number of reserved special figures 1 is set. Is updated by "-1" (step A506), the address of the random number storage area of Special Figure 1 is set, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507), and the information of the free area after the shift is cleared. (Step A508), the variation start information setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A505; N), the number of reserved special figures 2 is updated by "-1" (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 is set. The random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the effect command setting process described above, and the effect control device 300 receives the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. The detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is executed. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands (sometimes referred to as variable pattern commands) including information about patterns. For example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of the present embodiment. ..

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing (steps A317 and A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of the first embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is in high probability (step A551), and if it is not in special figure high probability (step A551; N), , Ends the high probability fluctuation count update process.

When one of the types of the special figure variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the big hit game state, the hit probability of the other variable display game is always controlled to be low, but one is small. In the case of a hit, the other may be in high probability.

When the probability is high (step A551; Y), the number of high-probability fluctuations that manages the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high-probability state is updated by "-1" (step A552), and the high-probability variation is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times is "0" (step A553).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A553; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A553; Y), the signal relating to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A555). The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the high probability & time reduction (high probability & no time reduction, or high probability & time reduction) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A556). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. Further, even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A557), the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A559), and the symbol that starts to fluctuate (special figure). The high-probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to FIG. 1 or special figure 2) is set (step A560), and the high-probability fluctuation number update process is completed.

The high-probability final fluctuation flag includes information capable of determining the type of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 or special figure 2) which is the high-probability final fluctuation. In addition, in the high-probability final fluctuation, the internal probability becomes low at the start of the fluctuation, so even if the fluctuation is low now, the information to show that the fluctuation started during the high probability is this high. Probability final fluctuation flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high probability final variation, the probability state (set state in the game control device 100) of the target special figure is returned to the low probability at the start of the variation. As a result, when the game ball wins the start opening during the final round of special figure fluctuation in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent the problem that the hit determination for the start winning is determined with high probability.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (step A9) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special drawing 1 changing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special drawing 1 changing process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A571), and then a command from the decorative special figure 1 command area (decorative special figure 1 including information on the stop symbol for special figure 1) is used. The command) is loaded, prepared (step A572), and the effect command setting process (step A573) is performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A574), the effect command setting process (step A575) is performed, and the high probability final is determined by the state of the high probability final fluctuation flag. It is determined whether or not it is fluctuating (step A576). If it is not a high-probability final variation (step A576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is set to the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in this special figure 1 variation display game. If it is set as the stop display time of (step A577) and has a high probability final fluctuation (step A576; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of this special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The setting (step A578) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 1, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. If there is, the display time is set to 2000 ms, and if the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 136 ms. Further, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A579 (FIG. 29), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 1 variable display game is out of order based on the information determined and set by the jackpot flag 1 setting process. (Step A579), if it is out of alignment (step A579; Y), the process proceeds to step A594, and if it is not out of alignment (step A579; N), special figure 2 is currently changing (special figure 2 variation display game is being executed). It is determined whether or not there is (step A580).

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is changing shall be made by any of the information in the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information in the special figure status area, and the information in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. Can be done. That is, if "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, it may be determined that it is changing, or if the special figure 2 changing is set in the special figure status area, it is determined that it is changing. It may be configured, or it may be determined that it is changing if the changing flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2, or it may be determined by a combination of these conditions.

Then, when the special figure 2 is also changing (step A580; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being executed (step A581), and the special figure 2 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A581; N), the number of symbol confirmation output times is updated by "+1" (step A582).

Next, when step A582 is completed and when the process during display of special figure 2 is being executed (step A581; Y), the display time of this special figure 1 (time set in step A577 or the like) For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (step A583), and the display time of the special figure 2 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A584). By the processing of steps A583 and A584, if the special figure 2 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 2 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of the special figure 2 is basically extended, but in some cases, it may be shortened.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 2 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 2) is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A585), and the effect command setting process (step A586) is performed. Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A587), the effect command setting process (step A588) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step). Perform A589).

According to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, if the current special figure 1 variable display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure being changed at the same time. The fluctuation display of 2 will be forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A589 is completed and when special figure 2 is not changing (step A580; N), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A590). , It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game of this time is a small hit (step A591).

Then, in the case of a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), information (number of special figure 1 rounds) is obtained from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area in order to control the big hit game after the special figure 1 fluctuation ends. Load the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information) that determines the upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit value information area (step A592), load the information from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area, and open the big winning opening. Save in the information area (step A593).

Next, when the special figure 1 variable display game this time is out of order (step A579; Y), and when the special figure 1 variable display game this time is a small hit (step A591; Y), step A593 is completed. If so, the process proceeds to step A594. When the process proceeds to step A594, the information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A594), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step). A595) is performed to end the special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the first start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as a means for ending the variable display game based on the second start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (step A49) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. 30 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of special drawing 2 during fluctuation processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special FIG. 2 variable processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A601), and a command from the decorative special figure 2 command area (decorative special figure 2 including information on the stop symbol for special figure 2) is performed. The command) is loaded, prepared (step A602), and the effect command setting process (step A603) is performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), the effect command setting process (step A605) is performed, and the high probability final is determined by the state of the high probability final fluctuation flag. It is determined whether or not it is fluctuating (step A606). If it is not a high-probability final variation (step A606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is set to the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in this special figure 2 variation display game. When the stop display time of (step A607) is set and the final fluctuation is high probability (step A606; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of this time. The setting (step A608) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A607 and A608 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A609.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 2, in the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. Even if there is, 600 ms is set as the display time, and 600 ms is set as the display time even when the stop symbol pattern is the small hit symbol pattern. Further, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms. In the case of the first embodiment, the stop symbol pattern is out of alignment, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern are set to have the same display time, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A609 (FIG. 31), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 2 variable display game is out of order based on the information determined and set by the jackpot flag 2 setting process. (Step A609), if it is out of alignment (step A609; Y), the process proceeds to step A624, and if it is not out of alignment (step A609; N), special figure 1 is currently changing (special figure 2 variation display game is being executed). It is determined whether or not there is (step A610).

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 is changing shall be made based on any of the information in the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information in the special figure status area, and the information in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. Can be done. That is, if "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area, it may be determined that the game is changing, or if the special figure 1 status area is set to change, it is determined that the game is changing. It may be configured, or it may be determined that it is changing if the changing flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1, or it may be determined by a combination of these conditions.

Then, when the special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step A611), and the special figure 1 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the symbol confirmation number output count is updated by "+1" (step A612).

Next, when step A612 is completed and when the process during display of special figure 1 is being executed (step A611; Y), the display time of special figure 2 this time (time set in step A607 or the like) For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 1 (step A613), and the display time of the special figure 1 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A614). By the processing of steps A613 and A614, if the special figure 1 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 1 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of the special figure 1 is basically extended, but in some cases, it may be shortened.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 1 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 1) is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A615), and the effect command setting process (step A616) is performed. Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A617), the effect command setting process (step A618) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step). A619) is performed.

According to the processing of steps A609 to A619 described above, if the current special figure 2 variable display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure being changed at the same time. The fluctuation display of 1 will be forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A619 is completed and when special figure 1 is not changing (step A610; N), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A620). , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game of this time is a small hit (step A621).

Then, in the case of a big hit and not a small hit (step A621; N), information (number of special figure 2 rounds) is obtained from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area in order to control the big hit game after the special figure 2 fluctuation ends. Load the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information) that determines the upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit value information area (step A622), load the information from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area, and open the big winning opening. Save in the information area (step A623).

Next, when the special figure 2 variable display game this time is out of order (step A609; Y) and when the special figure 2 variable display game this time is a small hit (step A621; Y), step A623 is completed. If so, the process proceeds to step A624. When the process proceeds to step A624, the information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A624), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step). Perform A625) to end the special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the second start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as a means for ending the variable display game based on the first start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step A595) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as the process number (step A631), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save the number or "2" (step A632).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the variation in Special Figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A634), special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A625) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as the process number (step A641), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A642).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 2 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A644), special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step A619) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. In addition, this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 forcibly ends the special figure 1 variable display game that has been fluctuating at the same time when the special figure 2 variable display game that started the fluctuation is a hit. It is a process to make it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and the device is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as the process number (step A651), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A652).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the variation in Special Figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A654), the detached stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A655). In this stop symbol pattern area, for the special figure 1 variable display game being executed, usually, a predetermined stop symbol pattern in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (depending on the extracted random number, a hit stop symbol pattern is used). (In some cases) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten as a detached stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in steps A656 to 661 after this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset in order to forcibly terminate it at the end.

Next, the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (the area for storing the special figure 1 round number upper limit information in RWM) is cleared (step A656), and the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (special figure in RWM) is cleared. Clear (step A657) (step A657), and save the information that is out of the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). The deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and the information on whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit or whether or not it is a big hit. It is an area of RWM that stores each of the information, and the information is normally set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, and the information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step A660), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A661), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A589) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game that started the fluctuation is a hit, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 forcibly ends the special figure 2 variable display game that has been fluctuating at the same time. It is a process to make it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and the device is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as the process number (step A671), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A672).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 2 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A674), the detached stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A675). In this stop symbol pattern area, for the special figure 2 variable display game being executed, usually, a predetermined stop symbol pattern in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (depending on the extracted random number, a hit stop symbol pattern is used). (In some cases) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten as a detached stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in steps A676 to 681 after this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset in order to forcibly terminate it at the end.

Next, the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (the area for storing the special figure 2 round number upper limit information in RWM) is cleared (step A676), and the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (special figure in RWM) is cleared. The area for storing the opening information of the two major winning openings) is cleared (step A677), and the information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). The deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and the information on whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or whether or not it is a big hit. It is an area of RWM that stores each of the information, and the information is normally set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step A680), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A681), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process (step A10) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 37, and 38. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment.

In the process of displaying the special figure 1, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A702).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A705), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1) is determined. The signal related to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706), the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step A707), the effect command setting process (step A708) is performed, and the number of rounds is performed. The upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 1. Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "4", or the like, for example, (There may be "8" or "2") is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (step A715) is performed. ..

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping probability, turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in high probability, and turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in low probability. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R collision, off if it is a 2R collision jackpot in high probability, and is turned on if it is a 2R collision jackpot in low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step A717), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A717). Step A718), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit that opens the upper prize opening (special variable winning device 38) (step A719).

If it is a big hit of opening the upper prize opening (step A719; Y), the information of the upper prize prize opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A720), and the fraudulent monitoring period outside flag is set in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A721), and the process proceeds to step A724.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit of opening the upper prize opening (step A719; N), the information of the lower prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A722), and the lower big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area is illegally monitored. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A723), and the process proceeds to step A724.

When shifting to step A724, 3 is set as the processing number (step A724), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step A725), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step). Perform A726) and end the processing during display of special figure 1.

On the other hand, in step A705, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727), and the small hit flag 1 is small. When it is determined that it is a hit (step A727; Y), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A728).

Then, in step A728, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A728; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A728; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A731), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A732). In step A732, assuming a mode in which the right-handed instruction notification is performed in the high-probability state, the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared because the high-probability final fluctuation is determined and the high-probability state is completed. Illustrate. However, when the present embodiment does not give a right-handed instruction notification in a high-probability state, step A732 deletes the configuration (or left-handed instruction notification in a high-probability state and left-handed instruction notification in step A732). There may be a configuration in which the flag is cleared).

Next, when step A732 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A728; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A733), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A734). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and the effect command setting process (step A736) is prepared. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the fanfare support state, the big hit, or the special mode is not performed) to be left-handed (step A737).

When it is determined in step A737 that the state should be left-handed (step A737; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A742.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A737; N), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740). The signal related to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A742.

When the process proceeds to step A742, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (step A742). If it is a small hit with the opening of the upper prize opening (step A742; Y), the information in the area of the number of illegal prizes in the upper prize opening is cleared (step A743), and the fraudulent monitoring period is out of the flag area The flag is saved (step A744), and the process proceeds to step A747.

On the other hand, if it is not a small hit to open the upper prize opening (step A742; N), the information in the lower prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A745), and the lower large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area is illegal. The out-of-monitoring period flag is saved (step A746), and the process proceeds to step A747.

When the process proceeds to step A747, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A747) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process ends. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, the process of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. ) Is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A748).
Then, in step A748, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A748; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A748; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A749), and the effect command setting process (step A750) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A751), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A752), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is hit (big hit or small hit) (step A753). Note that step A752 is only an example assuming a mode in which right-handed instruction notification is performed in a high probability state, as in step A732 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is not hit (step A753; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A753; N). In step A754), in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A755). In this embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is hit (big hit or small hit), the right side aims at the upper big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) opened at that time. In the case where the special figure 2 is hit (step A753; Y), steps A754 and A755 are passed to move to step A756 because the state to be hit is reached. Further, when step A755 is completed, the process proceeds to step A756.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A756, the information indicating that the special figure 1 change in the special figure status area in the RWM is being changed (the special figure 1 change display game is being executed) is cleared (information subtraction) (step A756), and the special figure 1 game is performed. The processing number, that is, "0", which is usually related to the special figure 1 processing, is saved in the processing number area (step A757), and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated. When step A756 is executed, the special figure status is either a state in which only the special figure 2 is changing, or a state in which neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process (step A50) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 39, 40, and 41. FIG. 39 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A761), and the information of the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A762).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A763), and the information in the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM is cleared (step A764). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A765), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A765; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2) is determined. The signal related to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A766), the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step A767), the effect command setting process (step A768) is performed, and the number of rounds is performed. The upper limit table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "4", or the like, for example, (There may be "8" or "2") is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A770). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A771).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A772), and the effect command setting process (step A773) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A774), and the effect command setting process (step A775) is performed. ..

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping probability, turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in high probability, and turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in low probability. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R collision, off if it is a 2R collision jackpot in high probability, and is turned on if it is a 2R collision jackpot in low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step A777), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A777). Step A778), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit that opens the upper prize opening (special variable winning device 38) (step A779).

If it is a big hit of opening the upper prize opening (step A779; Y), the information of the upper prize prize opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A780), and the fraudulent monitoring period outside flag is set in the upper prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A781), and the process proceeds to step A784.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit of opening the upper prize opening (step A779; N), the information of the lower prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A782), and the lower big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area is illegally monitored. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A783), and the process proceeds to step A784.

When moving to step A784, 3 is set as the processing number (step A784), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A785), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step). Perform A786) and end the processing during display of special figure 2.

On the other hand, in step A765, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A765; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787), and the small hit flag 2 is small. When it is determined that it is a hit (step A787; Y), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A788).

Then, in step A788, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A788; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A788; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A789), and the effect command setting process (step A790) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A791), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A792). In step A792, assuming a mode in which the right-handed instruction notification is performed in the high-probability state, the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared because the high-probability final fluctuation is determined and the high-probability state is completed. Illustrate. However, when the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handed instruction notification is not performed in the high-probability state, step A792 is deleted (or the left-handed instruction is notified in the high-probability state and the left-handed instruction is notified in step A792. There may be a configuration in which the flag is cleared).

Next, when step A792 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A788; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A793), and the effect command setting process (step A793) is performed. A794) is performed. Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and the effect command setting process (step A796) is prepared. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the fanfare support state, the big hit, or the special mode is not performed) to be left-handed (step A797).

When it is determined in step A797 that the state should be left-handed (step A797; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A802.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A797; N), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A800). The signal related to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to light the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A801), and the process proceeds to step A802.

When the process proceeds to step A802, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (step A802). If it is a small hit with the opening of the upper prize opening (step A802; Y), the information in the area of the number of illegal prizes in the upper prize opening is cleared (step A803), and the fraudulent monitoring period is outside the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening. The flag is saved (step A804), and the process proceeds to step A807.

On the other hand, if it is not a small hit to open the upper prize opening (step A802; N), the information in the lower prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A805), and the lower large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area is illegal. The out-of-monitoring period flag is saved (step A806), and the process proceeds to step A807.

When the process proceeds to step A807, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A807) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process ends. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, the process of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. ) Is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A808).
Then, in step A808, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A808; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A808; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A809), and the effect command setting process (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A811), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A812), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step A813). It should be noted that step A812 is only an example assuming a mode in which a right-handed instruction notification is made in a high probability state, as in step A792 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (step A813; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A813; N). In step A814), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (step A815). In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, a right-handed hit should be made aiming at the upper big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) opened at that time. If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step A813; Y), the game proceeds to step A816 by passing steps A814 and A815. Further, in this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is in a small hit, it is in a state where a left-handed hit should be made aiming at the lower large winning opening (special variable winning device 95) opened at that time. If the special figure 1 is not in the big hit (step A813; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is in the small hit), the process proceeds to step A816 after executing steps A814 and A815. However, the processing content related to such right-handed and left-handed hits varies depending on the board configuration of the game machine and the game characteristics, and is only an example. Also, here, when step A815 is completed, the process proceeds to step A816.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A816, the information indicating that the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM is changing (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed) is cleared (information subtraction) (step A816), and the special figure 2 game is performed. The processing number, that is, "0", which is usually related to the special figure 2 processing, is saved in the processing number area (step A817), and the special figure 2 display processing is terminated. When step A816 is executed, the special figure status becomes either a state in which only special figure 1 is changing or a state in which neither special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is changing.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. 42 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) are used. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or an internal management device for amusement parks or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error state and security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The on-data of the open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, when neither the glass frame opening error nor the main body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", "-1" is updated. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized in the main process described above and the initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the security signal control timer until the security signal control timer times out. The on-data of the security signal is output as external information.

Next, magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), panel radio fraud is occurring (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), and grand prize opening fraud is occurring (step C83; Y). Or, when an abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step C84; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is output as a test signal. Save to the data area (step C86). Similarly, when the Fuden fraud is occurring, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) The configuration may be used.

On the other hand, if none of the illegal magnet, the illegal board radio wave, the illegal frame radio wave, the illegal general electric wave, the illegal large winning opening, or the abnormal change in Special Figure 2 has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), the switch abnormality 1 or It is determined whether or not a switch error of switch error 2 is occurring (step C87), and if none of the switch errors is occurring (step C87; N), the off-data of the game machine error status signal is output as a test signal. Save to the data area (step C88).

Then, when any of the switch abnormalities is occurring (step C87; Y), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C86). Here, special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation, switch abnormality, etc. are abnormalities monitored by the winning port switch / status monitoring processing in the timer interrupt processing.

Next, after completing steps C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the winning signal (starting port 1 signal) of the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36, which is the starting winning opening of special drawing 1, the normal variable winning device 37) ) Is performed in the start port 1 signal editing process (step C89), and the winning signal (starting port 2 signal) of the starting port 2 (starting winning port 92, which is the starting winning port in FIG. 2) is edited. The signal editing process (step C90) is performed. Subsequently, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C91) for editing the main prize ball signal related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the symbol confirmation number signal is output based on the symbol confirmation number output number (symbol confirmation number signal output number). The symbol determination number signal editing process (step C92) for editing is performed, and the external information editing process is completed.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit allows interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each game machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)). ) Saves the initial value when the power is turned on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for accepting operations such as setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes the random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process by using, for example, the land function. Since the random function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the random function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes the received command check process. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.
[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that the preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sink interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or less than 1/30 second. Frame switching may be performed in a cycle.

By the frame switching timing determination process, the subsequent processes (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) are executed at the frame switching timing for each of the above processing cycles. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process of controlling various LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also produces an effect according to the special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, the number of balls rented)). It is a process to perform mode correction of.

After executing step D30, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processes of steps D18 to D30. That is, steps D18 to D30 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, a signal or the like may not be output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The reception command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The reception command (effect command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the game control device (main board) 100 sends the effect command to the effect control device 300. Are transmitted in sequence. In the following, such data that constitutes a command will be referred to as command data or command data.

Further, the command reception process from the main board is performed by the "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. All you have to do is take it out of the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether the loaded command data is normal, the command is concerned. The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by "1" by the stored data. In the description of the control process, the term "store" simply means that the device is readable and stored in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one cycle of the above-mentioned processing cycle) is stored.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the number of command receptions is "0 (zero)", and if the number of command receptions is not "0", the process proceeds to step D43, and the number of command receptions is "0". If so, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, as in step D41, “loading” data in the control process means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of command receptions, "A = B" immediately after the execution of step D41. Immediately after the execution of step D43, the normal movement is "A = AB = 0", but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device 300 is a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without disabling interrupts, so there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, in step D43, the subtraction process of "AB" is performed. I'm doing it. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A ← 0".

[Step D44] The control unit sets the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by "1" in the range of "0" to "31", for example. Do it. The range of "0" to "31" here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copy of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copy is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data not yet read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). To do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes the received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process for analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command this time). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process in MODE and the lower byte in ACT. In the case of a fluctuation system command that commands the fluctuation pattern of the special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. It is a thing.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the MODE value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the MODE value is not in the normal range. It should be noted that the value of MODE may not be defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that it is not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, they are separated within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit. It is checked whether the ACT value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that the range is normal (at this point, the toothlessness check described later has not been performed).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the value of the separated ACT is the correct combination with respect to the value of the separated MODE. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT values are the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT values are not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined using, for example, a match check table. In the match check table, all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT value is the correct combination is executed including the check for missing teeth whether or not the combination of ACT is normal for MODE. For one MODE, there are multiple valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command We are comparing and confirming whether is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if any of them matches.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Further, the variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. .. The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the production during the jackpot, and the range in which the data of the jackpot command can be obtained is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol-based command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol-based command range. .. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for commanding information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. .. Note that, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, model specification commands, and the like. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range. The control unit executes look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range (step D64), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead symbol command range. Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the read-ahead variable command range. The control unit executes look-ahead variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range (step D66), and receives it when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead variable command range. End the command analysis process.

The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands for the look-ahead effect. When any of the processes of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 is completed, the received command analysis process is completed.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning memory (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding) in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) when it is executed after that, the start winning memory is held and displayed in an unusual manner. Etc. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. In the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, the orientations of the parts to be mounted on the substrate are aligned in a specific direction. First, the substrate arrangement environment in the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. The same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 47 shows how the game machine 10 opens the front frame 12 with respect to the outer frame (main body frame) 11. The game machine 10 has an outer frame 11 fixed to a game hall facility generally called an island, and a front frame 12 is opened so that maintenance work can be performed by a staff member. Therefore, the game machine 10 is excellent in maintenance workability in the installation environment on the open side rather than the shaft support side that pivotally supports the front frame 12 on the outer frame 11. In particular, in recent game machines, since the amount of protrusion of the front side constituent members (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper plate 21) of the front frame 12 is large, the front frame 12 is used for the game hall equipment (for example, the calling lamp). , The card unit, etc.) may interfere with the opening amount of the front frame 12. The outer frame 11 allows the front frame 12 to be opened and closed with the left side as the rotation axis, but the front frame 12 may be openable and closable with the right side as the rotation axis.

The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300 on the back surface side of the game board 30. The game control device 100 includes a game control board 510 housed in a board box facing the connector connection portion. The effect control device 300 includes an effect control board 511 that is housed in a board box so as to face the connector connection portion. Further, the front frame 12 includes various substrates 512, 513, 514 facing the back surface side from the front frame 12. The various boards 512, 513, 514 are a control board (for example, a payout control board), a relay board (for example, a relay board 70), and other boards (for example, an LED board and a sensor board). Further, the front frame 12 makes the component mounting surface visible when the front frame 12 is opened, and supports the game control board 510, the effect control board 511, and various boards 512, 513, 514.

The game machine 10 electrically connects the game control board 510, the effect control board 511, and various boards 512, 513, 514 with a harness. At this time, the harness functions as a signal line for transmitting and receiving signals between the boards or a power line for transmitting power between the boards.

The front frame 12 includes various substrates and a harness connected to the substrate (not shown) so as to face the back surface side. The front frame 12 may have a substrate or a harness facing the back side via a protective cover (not shown).

Next, the game control device 100 supported by the front frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of the game control device of the second embodiment and a mounting base that supports the game control device with a front frame. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of an AA cross section of the game control device of the second embodiment.

The front frame 12 includes a mounting base 521 and supports the game control device 100 via the mounting base 521. The game control device 100 accommodates the game control board 510 in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and has an engaging portion 522 on the long side on the upper side and a locking portion 523 on the opposite side on the lower side. The mounting base 521 has a substantially rectangular shape that is one size larger than the substrate box 520, includes engaged portions 522a and 522b corresponding to the engaging portion 522, and locked portion 523a corresponding to the locking portion 523. To be equipped.

The board box 520 first engages the engaging portion 522 and the engaged portions 522a and 522b, mounts the engaging portion 522 on the mounting base 521 with the engaging portion 522 as a rotation axis, and then mounts the locking portion 523. By locking to the locked portion 523a, it is fixed to the mounting base 521. When the board box 520 is removed from the mounting base 521, the board box 520 requires an operation to release the locked state between the locked portion 523 and the locked portion 523a. Therefore, the locking portion 523 has a side surface as an operating portion for releasing the locked state of the board box 520 for the operator who performs the maintenance work of the game machine 10.

The board box 520 has an upper member 5201 and a lower member 5202 as a main structure, and the game control board 510 is sandwiched and accommodated between the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202. The upper member 5201 supports the game control board 510 with the board support portion 5203 (for example, a boss), and fixes the game control board 510 with screws 5204. Further, the lower member 5202 supports the game control board 510 by the board support portion 5205 (for example, a rib). As a result, the game control board 510 is supported with a predetermined gap from the outer surfaces of both the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202.

The upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 are crimped by a caulking portion 524 (for example, a screw or the like). The caulking unit 524 makes it possible to switch between the caulked state and the crimped state by a predetermined number of times, leaving a trace. For example, the caulking portion 524 has a required number of screws before caulking, and one of them is crimped to be in a caulked state, and a trace (for example, for example) is created by destroying a prepared portion of the substrate box 520. It is possible to release the crimped state by holding the cutting marks of the resin, etc.). Further, the substrate box 520 is provided with a sealing portion 525, and a sealing seal 525a is attached thereto, so that it is possible to detect whether or not the substrate box 520 has been opened depending on the state of the sealing seal 525a. For example, the sealing seal 525a is broken by opening the substrate box 520, and the broken state indicates that the substrate box 520 has been opened. The sealing seal 525a may include an RF (Radio Frequency) tag or the like, and indicates whether or not the substrate box 520 has been opened by short-range wireless communication (for example, by detecting the destruction of the antenna due to a communication failure). It may be something that can be detected.

The game control board 510 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 510 is a two-layer board having a front surface as a component mounting surface and a back surface as a solder surface. The game control board 510 includes a required number of connectors 530 and components 540 on the component mounting surface. The component 540 is inside the board box 520 and is not exposed to the outside so that it cannot be replaced with an illegal component. On the other hand, the connector 530 faces the outside of the board box 520 from the window portion 5209 which is an opening provided in the board box 520 (upper member 5201), and can be connected to a predetermined harness by a connector. By arranging most of the connectors 530 on the upper side of the game control board 510, it is possible to prevent the harness from becoming an obstacle to observing the component mounting surface. Further, the game control board 510 has a connector arranged on the lower side, but such a connector is limited to a connector (for example, an inspection connector or the like) to which a harness is not connected in an operating environment. As a result, the game machine 10 achieves both efficiency of component placement and suppression of obstacles in observing the component mounting surface.

Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 50 (1) is provided with a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as a component 540 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. The resistor 541 is a resistor arranged in a direction along the left-right direction of the front frame 12. The resistor 542 is a resistor arranged in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction of the front frame 12, that is, a direction along the vertical direction of the front frame 12.

The resistors 541 and 542 are passive elements whose ratings are indicated by a color code and have a required number of color bands. For example, the resistors 541 and 542 have four color bands, the first number indicated by the first color band 543, the second number indicated by the second color band 544, and the multiplier indicated by the third color band 545. The nominal resistance value tolerance indicated by the fourth color band 546 is displayed. Therefore, the resistors 541 and 542 can enhance the ease of confirmation as the resistors 541 and 542 by facilitating the confirmation of the first color band 543. The resistors 541 and 542 display the first color band 543 on the side where the color band spacing is narrow, and display the fourth color band 546 on the side where the color band spacing is wide.

As shown in FIG. 50 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. The front frame 12 has an open side (open end side) on the left side and a shaft support side (rotating shaft side) on the right side with respect to the main body frame 11. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12. In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 facing the shaft support side of the front frame 12.

As a result, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the operator who performs maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the lower side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing the lower side of the front frame 12. In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 542 facing upward of the front frame 12.

Further, the game control board 510 includes a connector 530a used for game control and a connector 530b (inspection connector) used for a predetermined inspection and not used for game control. Since the connector 530a connects a predetermined connector to the harness, if the harness is applied to the component mounting surface of the game control board 510, the visibility of the mounted component may be hindered. That is, in the game control board 510, even if the harness may be applied to the component mounting surface of the game control board 510, the visibility of the first color band 543 is improved as compared with the fourth color band 546, and the resistance 542 is increased. Improves ease of confirmation. Since the connector 530b is not connected to the connector during commercial operation of the game machine 10 in the game hall, it does not hinder the observation of the component mounting surface.

As a result, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator (facilitating the inspection work). Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 51 from another viewpoint. FIG. 51 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 51 (1) is provided with the required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with the required number of resistors 541 and 542 as the component 540 on the component mounting surface in the required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in the board box 520 and is supported by the front frame 12 with the engaging portion 522 of the board box 520 on the upper side and the locking portion 523 on the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 51 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

As a result, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the operator who performs maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (3), in the resistor 542, the first color band 543 is directed to the locking portion 523 side of the substrate box 520, and the fourth color band 546 is directed to the engaging portion 522 side of the substrate box 520. Turn.

As a result, the game machine 10 resists the operator with reference to the locking portion 523, which is the operating portion when the board box 520 is removed from the front frame 12 when the front frame 12 is opened to perform maintenance and inspection work. 542 can be confirmed. That is, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 52 from another viewpoint. FIG. 52 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 52 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and one connector 530b on the component mounting surface. The connector 530a is a connector used for game control, and the connector 530b is, for example, an inspection connector, which is used for a predetermined inspection and is not used for game control. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the required harness is usually connected to the connector 530a by the connector, but the harness is not usually connected to the connector 530b at the time of commercial operation in the game hall. Further, the connector 530b can be easily distinguished from the connector 530a from the viewpoint of whether or not the harness is connected to the connector. The connector 530b may be distinguished by being colored differently from the connector 530a so that the connector 530b is red and the connector 530a is non-red, in addition to the presence or absence of the harness connection. Further, the connector 530b may be distinguished from the connector 530a by a shape different from that of the connector 530a so that the connector 530b is a modular type and the connector 530a is a non-modular type, in addition to the presence or absence of a harness connection.

Further, the game control board 510 is provided with the required number of resistors 541 and 542 as the component 540 on the component mounting surface in the required direction, and the processor 532 is provided on the component mounting surface. For example, the processor 532 is a gaming microcomputer 111. The processor 532 can be distinguished from other integrated circuits (for example, a driver IC) by affixing a sticker or the like indicating the model name. The processor 532 can also be distinguished by the maximum number of pins among the components mounted on the game control board 510. Further, the processor 532 may be distinguished by being given a predetermined color so that the processor 532 is blue and the other integrated circuits are non-blue (for example, black).

As a result, the game control board 510 makes it possible to specify the connector 530b as a specific connector to be mounted, and to specify the processor 532 as a specific integrated circuit to be mounted.

In the game control board 510, the connector 530b and the processor 532 are arranged with an offset d1 in the left-right direction and an offset d2 in the vertical direction. The offset d1 has a positive direction in which the connector 530b is located and a negative direction in which the connector 530b is not located with respect to the processor 532. Further, the offset d2 has a positive direction in which the connector 530b is located and a negative direction in which the connector 530b is not located with respect to the processor 532.

As shown in FIG. 52 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the positive direction side of the offset d1 and the fourth color band 546 to the negative direction side of the offset d1.
As a result, the game machine 10 clarifies the reference direction of the resistor 541 and improves the ease of checking the resistor 541 by the operator who opens the front frame 12 and performs maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 toward the positive direction side of the offset d2 and the fourth color band 546 toward the negative direction side of the offset d2.
As a result, the game machine 10 clarifies the reference direction of the resistor 542 and improves the ease of checking the resistor 542 of the operator who opens the front frame 12 and performs maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

The positive direction of the offset d1 is the same as that of the front frame open side, and the negative direction of the offset d1 is the same as that of the front frame shaft support side. Further, the positive direction of the offset d2 is the same as the lower side of the front frame, and the negative direction of the offset d1 is the same as the upper side of the front frame. Similarly, the positive direction of the offset d2 is the same as the board box locking portion side, and the negative direction of the offset d2 is the same as the substrate box engaging portion side.

Therefore, the game machine 10 can improve the visibility of the resistors 541 and 542 while clarifying the reference directions of the resistors 541 and 542.
Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 53 from another viewpoint. FIG. 53 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 53 (1) is provided with the required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with the required number of resistors 541 and 542 as the component 540 on the component mounting surface in the required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in a board box 520 and sealed by a sealing seal 5251 at a sealing portion 525.

The sealing seal 5251 displays a required character or design. For example, the sealing seal 5251 displays the characters "opening prohibited". The sealing seal 5251 may display management information by displaying an image such as an alphanumeric character, a symbol, or a two-dimensional code. Further, the sealing seal 5251 may be used to clarify the source or display a design for preventing counterfeiting. The sealing seal 5251 clearly indicates the correct position of the sealing seal 5251 by a required character or design. For example, the sealing seal 5251 has a normal position (reference to the sealing portion) when the right side of the drawing is viewed downward.

As shown in FIG. 53 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

As a result, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the operator who performs maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (3), in the resistor 542, the first color band 543 is directed to the left side of the sealing portion reference (lower side in the drawing), and the fourth color band 546 is directed to the right side of the sealing portion reference (upper side in the drawing). Turn to.
As a result, the game machine 10 allows the operator to confirm the resistance 542 with reference to the sealing portion 525 when the front frame 12 is opened and the maintenance and inspection work is performed. That is, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510. Since the confirmation of the soundness of the sealing seal 525 and the confirmation of the game control board 510 are closely related to each other, it is easy for the operator to understand that the sealing portion 525 is used as a reference.

Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 from another viewpoint. FIG. 54 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 54 (1) is provided with a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as a component 540 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in a board box 520 and sealed by a sealing seal 5251 at a sealing portion 525. Further, the control number sticker 5206 is attached to the surface of the substrate box 520. The control number sticker 5206 displays necessary information while using a transparent material as a base to facilitate confirmation of the component mounting surface. For example, the control number sticker 5206 displays the main board control number as required information. For example, the control number sticker 5206 displays the required information in black or white with a solid background of the characters as needed. The control number sticker 5206 clearly indicates the correct position of the control number sticker 5206 by displaying the required information. For example, the control number sticker 5206 has a normal position (control number sticker reference) when the lower side in the drawing is viewed downward.

The sealing seal 5251 displays a required character or design. For example, the sealing seal 5251 displays the characters "opening prohibited". The sealing seal 5251 clearly indicates the correct position of the sealing seal 5251 by a required character or design. For example, the sealing seal 5251 has a normal position (sealing seal reference) in the direction in which the right side of the drawing is viewed downward.

The direction of the control number seal standard and the direction of the seal seal standard are orthogonal to each other. The direction of the control number seal reference indicates the arrangement direction of the resistor 541, and the orientation of the sealing seal reference indicates the arrangement direction of the resistor 542.

As shown in FIG. 54 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the control number seal reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the left side of the control number seal reference.

As a result, the game machine 10 can make the operator confirm the position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 by having the operator confirm the control number sticker 5206, and the ease of confirming the resistor 541 is improved. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the sealing seal reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing the left side of the sealing seal reference.

As a result, the game machine 10 can make the operator confirm the position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 by having the operator confirm the sealing seal 5251, and the ease of confirming the resistor 542 is improved. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Since the type of the game control device by the control number sticker 5206, the confirmation of the soundness of the sealing seal 5251, and the confirmation of the game control board 510 are closely related, the control number sticker 5206 and the sealing seal 5251 are used. The standard is easy for the operator to understand.

Next, the display of the part numbers on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of display of a resistor mounted on the game control board of the second embodiment and a corresponding part number.

Part number 547 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is displayed in the vicinity of the resistor 541 in the same direction as the resistor 541. The part number 547 displays, for example, the character "R15". At this time, the first character "R" of the part number 547 is on the first color band 543 side of the resistor 541, and the last character "5" of the part number 547 is on the fourth color band 546 side of the resistor 541.

As a result, the game machine 10 makes it easy to find the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 by using the first character of the part number 547 as a clue. Further, the game machine 10 uses the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 as a clue to facilitate the discovery of the first character of the part number 547.

Part number 548 shown in FIG. 55 (2) is displayed in the vicinity of the resistor 542 in the same direction as the resistor 542. The part number 548 displays, for example, the character "R16". At this time, the first character "R" of the part number 548 is on the first color band 543 side of the resistor 542, and the last character "6" of the part number 548 is on the fourth color band 546 side of the resistor 542.

As a result, the game machine 10 makes it easy to find the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 by using the first character of the part number 548 as a clue. Further, the game machine 10 uses the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 as a clue to facilitate the discovery of the first character of the part number 548.

Up to this point, resistors 541 and 542 have been described as the components 540 included in the game control board 510, but the components provided on the component mounting surface in the required orientation are not limited to this. A component provided on the component mounting surface in a required orientation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a component provided on the component mounting surface of the second embodiment.

For example, the game control board 510 may include a chip (surface mount) type resistor 549, as shown in FIG. 56 (1). The resistor 549 is a passive element whose rating is indicated by a character string, and has a required number of characters. The resistor 549 has three letters and displays the first number, the second number, and the multiplier in order from the left. For example, the resistor 549 indicates 1 kΩ by the three letters “1”, “0”, and “2”. Therefore, the resistor 549 can improve the ease of confirmation of the resistor 549 by facilitating the confirmation of the first character.

The part number 550 is displayed in the same direction as the character string displayed by the resistor 549 in the vicinity of the resistor 549. The part number 550 displays, for example, the character "R16". At this time, the first character "R" of the part number 550 is on the "1" side indicating the first number of the resistor 549, and the last character "6" of the part number 550 is on the "2" side indicating the multiplier of the resistor 549. ..

As a result, the game machine 10 makes it easy to find the first digit of the resistor 549 by using the first character of the part number 550 as a clue. Further, the game machine 10 uses the first number of the resistor 549 as a clue to facilitate the discovery of the first character of the part number 550.

Further, the game control board 510 may include a capacitor 551 as shown in FIG. 56 (2). The capacitor 551 is a passive element whose rating is indicated by a color code, and has a required number of color bands. The capacitor 551 has three color bands, and displays a first number indicated by the first color band 552, a second number indicated by the second color band 553, and a multiplier indicated by the third color band 554. Therefore, the capacitor 551 can improve the ease of confirmation of the capacitor 551 by facilitating the confirmation of the first color band 552. The capacitor 551 displays the first color band 552 on the side where the color band spacing is narrow, and displays the third color band 554 on the side where the color band spacing is wide.

The part number 555 is displayed in the vicinity of the capacitor 551 in the direction in which the color bands displayed by the capacitor 551 are lined up. The part number 555 displays, for example, the character "C10". At this time, the first character "C" of the part number 555 is on the first color band 552 side of the capacitor 551, and the last character "0" of the part number 555 is on the third color band 554 side of the capacitor 551.

As a result, the game machine 10 makes it easy to find the first number of the capacitor 551 by using the first character of the part number 555 as a clue. Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the first number of the capacitor 551 as a clue to facilitate the discovery of the first character of the part number 555.

Further, the game control board 510 may include a capacitor 556 as shown in FIG. 56 (3). The capacitor 556 is a passive element whose rating is indicated by a character string, and has a required number of characters. The capacitor 556 has three letters and displays a first number, a second number, and a multiplier in order from the left. For example, the capacitor 556 indicates 10000 pF by the three letters "1", "0", and "3". Therefore, the capacitor 556 can improve the ease of confirmation of the capacitor 556 by facilitating the confirmation of the first character.

The part number 557 is displayed in the vicinity of the capacitor 556 in the direction in which the character strings displayed by the capacitor 556 are lined up. The part number 557 displays, for example, the character "C11". At this time, the first character "C" of the part number 557 is on the "1" side indicating the first number of the capacitor 556, and the last character "1" of the part number 557 is on the "3" side indicating the multiplier of the capacitor 556. ..

As a result, the game machine 10 makes it easy to find the first number of the capacitor 556 by using the first character of the part number 557 as a clue. Further, the game machine 10 uses the first number of the capacitor 556 as a clue to facilitate the discovery of the first character of the part number 557.

[Modification 1 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment will be described. In the game machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment, the orientations of the parts mounted on the substrate are aligned with the specific directions related to the two-dimensional codes provided by the control number sticker and the sealing sticker, respectively. The mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board 510 of the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the first modification of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is provided with the required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with the required number of resistors 541 and 542 as the component 540 on the component mounting surface in the required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in a board box 520 and sealed by a sealing seal 5252 at a sealing portion 525. Further, the control number sticker 5207 is attached to the surface of the substrate box 520. The control number sticker 5207 displays necessary information while making it easy to confirm the component mounting surface using the base as a transparent material. For example, the control number sticker 5207 displays the control code 5208 as required information. For example, the management code 5208 displays a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark), etc.). The control code 5208 clearly indicates the normal position of the control code 5208 by a display mode in which the alignment pattern appearing in the pattern is displayed on the lower right side. For example, the management code 5208 has a normal position (management code reference) in the direction in which the lower side in the drawing is viewed downward.

The sealing seal 5252 displays the sealing code 5253 as required information. For example, the sealing code 5253 displays a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark), etc.). The sealing code 5253 clearly indicates the normal position of the sealing code 5253 by a display mode in which the alignment pattern appearing in the pattern is displayed on the lower right side. For example, the sealing code 5253 has a normal position (sealing code reference) in the direction in which the right side of the drawing is viewed downward.

The orientation of the control code reference and the orientation of the sealing code reference are orthogonal to each other. The orientation of the control code reference indicates the arrangement direction of the resistor 541, and the orientation of the sealing code reference indicates the arrangement direction of the resistor 542.

As shown in FIG. 57 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the control code reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the left side of the control code reference.

As a result, the game machine 10 can make the operator confirm the position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 by confirming the control code 5208 (control number sticker 5207), and improve the ease of confirming the resistor 541. To do. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the sealing cord reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing the left side of the sealing cord reference.

As a result, the game machine 10 can make the operator confirm the position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 by confirming the sealing code 5253 (sealing seal 5252), which makes it easier to confirm the resistor 542. improves. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Since the type of the game control device is grasped by the management code 5208, the soundness is confirmed by the sealing code 5253 (or the validity of the sealing seal 5252 is confirmed), and the confirmation of the game control board 510 is closely related. It is easy for the operator to understand that the control code 5208 or the sealing code 5253 is used as a reference.

[Modification 2 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment is different from the substrate box 520 of the second embodiment in that the positions of the engaging portion and the locking portion are reversed.

First, the game control device 100 supported by the front frame 12 of the modified example 2 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of the game control device of the second modification of the second embodiment and the mounting base in which the game control device is supported by the front frame.

The front frame 12 includes a mounting base 550 and supports the game control device 100 via the mounting base 550. The game control device 100 accommodates the game control board 510 in the board box 551. The substrate box 551 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and has a locking portion 552 on the long side on the upper side and an engaging portion 553 on the opposite side on the lower side. The mounting base 550 has a substantially rectangular shape that is one size larger than the substrate box 551, includes engaged portions 553a and 553b corresponding to the engaging portion 553, and is locked portion 552a corresponding to the locking portion 552. To be equipped.

In the board box 551, the engaging portion 553 and the engaged portions 553a and 535b are first engaged, and then the engaging portion 553 is placed on the mounting base 550 with the engaging portion 553 as a rotation axis, and the locking portion 552 is placed on the mounting base 550. By locking to the locked portion 552a, it is fixed to the mounting base 550. When mounting the board box 551 on the mounting base 550, the board box 551 requires an operation of first engaging the engaging portion 553 and the engaged portions 553a and 535b. Therefore, the engaging portion 553 has a side surface as a work starting point of the mounting work of the board box 551 for the operator who performs the maintenance work of the game machine 10.

The connector 530a faces the outside of the board box 551 from an opening window provided in the board box 551 (upper member), and can be connected to a predetermined harness by a connector. By arranging the connector 530a on the upper side of the game control board 510, it is possible to prevent the harness from becoming an obstacle to observing the component mounting surface. Further, in the game control board 510, the harness hinders the visibility of the locking portion 552 by arranging the connector 530a on the upper side. Such a game control device 100 hinders the operability of a third party who tries to perform an illegal operation.

Next, mounting of a resistor (resistor) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 59 (1) is provided with a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with a required number of resistors 541 and 542 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in the board box 551 and is supported by the front frame 12 with the locking portion 552 of the board box 551 on the upper side and the engaging portion 553 on the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 59 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

As a result, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the operator who performs maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 toward the engaging portion 553 side of the substrate box 551 and the fourth color band 546 toward the locking portion 552 side of the substrate box 551. Turn.

As a result, the game machine 10 resists the operator with reference to the engaging portion 553, which is the work starting point when the board box 551 is attached to the front frame 12 when the front frame 12 is opened to perform maintenance and inspection work. 542 can be confirmed. That is, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

[Modification 3 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment will be described. The game machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment is different from the game control board 510 of the second embodiment in that a reset SW is provided on the board. The mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board of the third modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the third modification of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 555 shown in FIG. 60 (1) is provided with a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with a required number of resistors 541 and 542 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. Further, the game control board 555 is provided with a reset SW556 at one corner of the rectangular board. For example, the game control board 555 includes a reset SW556 in the lower left corner of the board. The lower left corner of the board is on the open end side of the front frame 12 and is at a position where the operability of the reset SW556 is excellent, and the harness connected to the connector 530a is a position where the operability of the reset SW556 is not hindered.

The resistor 541 is a resistor arranged in a direction along the left-right direction of the front frame 12. The resistor 542 is a resistor arranged in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction of the front frame 12, that is, a direction along the vertical direction of the front frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 60 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. That is, the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 in the direction in which the reset SW556 is located on the game control board 555. Therefore, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 directed in the direction in which the reset SW556 is located. In other words, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 541 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 facing in the direction in which the reset SW556 is not present.

As a result, the game machine 10 provides the reset SW556 as a suitable mark to the operator who performs the maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12, and improves the ease of checking the resistor 541. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 555.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the lower side of the front frame 12. That is, the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 in the direction in which the reset SW556 is located on the game control board 555. Therefore, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 542 by directing the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 in the direction in which the reset SW556 is located. In other words, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 542 by directing the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 542 in the direction in which the reset SW556 is not present.

As a result, the game machine 10 provides the reset SW556 as a suitable mark to the operator who performs the maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12, and improves the ease of checking the resistor 542. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 555.

As a result, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 555.

In addition, the modification 3 of the second embodiment has been described by exemplifying the reset SW556 as a reference component for grasping the orientation of the resistors 541 and 542, but if it is provided in one corner of a rectangular substrate, it will be described. , Other parts may be used as reference parts.

Further, the third modification of the second embodiment has been described by exemplifying the lower left corner of the substrate as one corner of the rectangular substrate, but one corner of the rectangular substrate is the upper left, upper right, lower right, etc. It may be the one.

Although the game control board 510 has been described as an example of the second embodiment, the effect control board 511, various other control boards (for example, payout control board), the relay board (for example, the relay board 70), and the like. It can also be applied to other substrates (for example, LED substrates and sensor substrates).

Regarding the second embodiment, the game control board 510 is illustrated, and instead of the resistors 541 and 542, the resistors 549 and the capacitors 551 and 556 may be mounted, but the second embodiment. The same can be applied to the modified example of. Further, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including a modified example) may mount a resistor 549 and capacitors 551 and 556 in addition to the resistors 541 and 542, and mount different kinds of parts in a mixed manner. It may be what is done. Even if different parts are mixed, the game machine 10 can improve the ease of checking the parts according to the above-mentioned arrangement rules.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 has a main body frame (outer frame 11), a front frame (front frame 12) that can be opened and closed with one of the left and right sides of the main body frame as a rotation axis, and a front surface with visible component mounting surfaces. A substrate supported by the frame (for example, a game control substrate 510) is included. When a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) whose rating is indicated by a color code is mounted on the substrate in the left-right direction, the first color band of the color code is set to the open end side of the front frame (see FIG. 50).

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a storage case (for example, a board box 551) that houses a board by making the component mounting surface visible. The storage case has an engaging portion that engages with the front frame (for example, the engaged portions 553a and 553b included in the mounting base 550 of the front frame 12) on one side (for example, the lower side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. (For example, the engaging portion 553) and the other side along the left-right direction with the engaging portion as the rotation axis are engaged with the front frame (for example, the locked portion 552a provided on the mounting base 550 of the front frame 12). Includes a stop (eg, locking 552). When the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) is mounted in the direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (vertical direction) of the substrate, the first color band of the color code is set to the engaging portion side (see FIGS. 58 and 59). ..

(3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a storage case (for example, a board box 520) that houses a board by making the component mounting surface visible. The storage case has an engaging portion (for example, an engaging portion 522a, 522b included in the mounting base 521 of the front frame 12) that engages with the front frame (for example, the engaged portions 522a and 522b) on one side (upper side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. The engaging portion 522) and the locking portion (for example, the locked portion 523a provided on the mounting base 521 of the front frame 12) on the other side along the left-right direction with the engaging portion as the rotation axis. For example, it includes a locking portion 523). When the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) is mounted on the substrate in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (direction in the vertical direction), the first color band of the color code is set to the locking portion side (see FIG. 51).

(4) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a storage case (for example, a board box 520) that houses a board by making the component mounting surface visible. The accommodating case accommodates a substrate with a plurality of connectors (for example, connectors 530a) on the substrate facing one side (upper side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. When the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) is mounted in the direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (vertical direction), the substrate has the first color band of the color code on the other side (lower side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. ) (See FIG. 50).

(5) When the passive element (for example, resistor 542) is mounted in the direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (vertical direction), the substrate of (1) sets the first color band of the color code as the front frame (front frame 12). ) (See FIG. 50).

(6) The gaming machine 10 of (5) includes a storage case (for example, a board box 520) that houses a board by making the component mounting surface visible. The accommodating case accommodates the substrate with a plurality of connectors (for example, connectors 530a) on the substrate facing above the front frame (see FIG. 48).

(7) The game machine 10 includes a rectangular board (for example, a game control board 510) and a storage case (for example, a board box 520) for accommodating the board by making the component mounting surface visible. The storage case includes a base portion (for example, lower member 5202) that supports the substrate, a covering portion (for example, upper member 5201) that covers the substrate from the component mounting surface and engages with the base portion, and a base portion and a cover. Includes a sealing portion (eg, sealing portion 525) that seals the engagement relationship with the body portion. In the substrate, a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) whose rating is indicated by a color code is oriented parallel to one side of the sealing portion side (for example, the right side of the game control substrate 510 shown in FIG. 53) (for example, a front frame). When mounting in the vertical direction of 12), the first color band of the color code is set to the left side (for example, the left side of the sealing portion reference) when the sealing portion is viewed downward (see FIGS. 48 and 53).

(8) The game machine 10 includes a rectangular board (for example, a game control board 510) and a storage case (for example, a board box 520) for accommodating the board by making the component mounting surface visible. The storage case includes a first case portion (for example, upper member 5201) that covers the component mounting surface of the substrate, a second case portion (for example, lower member 5202) that engages with the first case portion, and a first case portion. A sealing portion (for example, a sealing portion 525) that seals the engagement relationship between the second case portion and the second case portion is included. In the substrate, a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) whose rating is indicated by a color code is oriented parallel to one side of the sealing portion side (for example, the right side of the game control substrate 510 shown in FIG. 53) (for example, a front frame). When mounting in the vertical direction of 12), the first color band of the color code is set to the left side (for example, the left side of the sealing portion reference) when the sealing portion is viewed downward (see FIGS. 48 and 53).

(9) The game machine 10 includes a rectangular board (for example, a game control board 510) and a storage case (for example, a board box 520) for accommodating the board by making the component mounting surface visible. The storage case has one orientation (for example, a lower member 5202) that supports the substrate, a cover that covers the substrate from the component mounting surface and engages with the substrate (for example, the upper member 5201). For example, the direction in which the control number slip (for example, the control number sticker 5206) attached along the front frame 12 in the left-right direction and the engagement relationship between the base portion and the covering portion are orthogonal to one direction. (For example, the sealing portion (for example, the sealing portion 525) to be sealed by the sealing slip (for example, the sealing seal 5251) attached in the vertical direction of the front frame 12) is included. When a passive element (for example, resistor 541) whose rating is displayed by a color code is mounted on the substrate in one direction, the first color band of the color code is on the left side (for example, the control number) when the control number slip is viewed in the normal position. When the passive element (for example, resistor 542) is mounted in the direction orthogonal to one direction with the seal reference left side, the first color band of the color code is on the left side (for example, sealing) when the sealing slip is viewed in the normal position. Set to the left side of the seal reference) (see FIG. 54).

(10) The control number slip and the seal slip of (9) indicate their correct positions by the character strings to be displayed (for example, the main board control number, the character "opening prohibited", etc.) (see FIG. 54).
(11) The control number slip and the sealing slip of (9) each indicate a normal position by an image display (for example, a two-dimensional code, a design, etc.) (see FIG. 57).

The image display of (12) and (11) is a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 57).
(13) The game machine 10 has a rectangular board (game control board 510) including a processor (for example, a processor 532) and an inspection terminal (for example, a connector 530b) that is used for inspection but not for game control. Be prepared. On the board, the processor and the inspection terminal are mounted with offsets (offsets d1 and d2) in the vertical and horizontal directions, respectively, and passive elements (for example, resistors 541 and 542) whose ratings are displayed by color codes are mounted in the vertical and horizontal directions. When a plurality of passive elements are mounted in the vertical direction (for example, resistor 542) and the passive element mounted in the horizontal direction (for example, resistor 541), the direction in which the inspection terminal is located with respect to the processor is determined by the color code. The direction in which the first color band is located is set (see FIG. 52).

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the orientations of the components mounted between the integrated circuit and the connector on the substrate are aligned in a specific direction in the positional relationship between the integrated circuit and the connector. First, the substrate arrangement environment in the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement relationship of integrated circuits, connectors, and resistors on the game control board of the third embodiment and the orientation of the resistors mounted on the game control board. The same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61 (1), the game machine 10 mounts the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, 563 on the board mounting surface of the game control board 510. The integrated circuit 560 is a rectangular IC package having one side in the longitudinal direction in a front view. For example, an input signal driver IC (more specifically, the integrated circuit 560 is an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121. ). The integrated circuit 560 is an example of an integrated circuit mounted on the game control board 510, and may be an output signal driver IC, a required control circuit, a buffer circuit, a port expander, or the like.

The connectors 561, 562, 563 are connectors for inputting / outputting signals input / output from the integrated circuit 560 to the outside. The connectors 561, 562, 563 and the integrated circuit 560 face each other with a component placement area 566 sandwiched between them.

In the component placement area 566, a linear resistor 541 (linear component: for example, part numbers R22 and R21) is arranged on the integrated circuit 560 side of the line TL, and a linear resistor 542 is arranged on the connector 561, 562, 563 side of the line TL. (Linear parts: for example, part numbers R15, R3, R2) are arranged. The resistor 541 is arranged in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the integrated circuit 560 (horizontal direction in the drawing), and the resistor 542 is arranged in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the integrated circuit 560 (vertical direction in the drawing). In other words, the resistor 542 is arranged in the direction connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the connector 561,562,563 (vertical direction in the drawing), and the resistor 541 is orthogonal to the direction connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the connector 561,562,563. It is arranged in the direction (horizontal direction in the figure).

The game control board 510 is a multilayer board (for example, a two-layer board), and when the connector 561,562,563 and the integrated circuit 560 are connected via a resistor 542, the first layer (for example, component mounting) is used. The wiring pattern is passed through the surface), and when the connector 561, 562, 563 and the integrated circuit 560 are connected via the resistor 541, the wiring pattern is passed through the second layer (for example, the solder surface).

As a result, the game control board 510 facilitates the wiring pattern passing through the resistor 541 and the wiring pattern passing through the resistor 542. Further, the game control board 510 divides the component arrangement area 566 and aligns the directions of the resistors 541 and 542, which facilitates component confirmation. Further, since the game control board 510 divides the part arrangement area 566 and aligns the directions of the resistors 541 and 542, it is easy to secure the part number display area.

In the game control board 510, resistors 541 and 542 are illustrated as an example of mounting components, but in place of the resistors 541 and 542, or in addition to the resistors 541 and 542, other components having a mounting direction are placed in the component placement area 566. It may be implemented in.

Further, the game control board 510 may limit the orientation of the components in the component placement area between all the integrated circuits and all the connectors, or may limit only a part of the orientation of the components. .. For example, the connectors 561 and 562 are connectors to be connected to the start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a), and their existence is clearly indicated by the fluorescent color. The game control board 510 may set a component placement area between the connectors 561 and 562, which require attention as such fraud monitoring targets, and the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the left side (open side of the front frame 12). In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 facing the right side (the shaft support side of the front frame 12).

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 downward. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing downward (lower side of the front frame 12). In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 542 facing upward (upper side of the front frame 12).

As a result, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistors 541 and 542 of the operator who performs the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

Next, a setting example of the line TL will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a setting example of the line TL of the third embodiment.
The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (1) is set to pass through the lower end of the through hole 564 into which the lead wire on the lower side (integrated circuit 560 side) of the resistor 542 is inserted. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 on the resistance 542 side of the line TL. The line TL is not limited to the lower end of the through hole 564, and may be set between the upper end and the lower end of the through hole 564.

The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (2) is set to pass through the lower end (integrated circuit 560 side) of the main body (excluding the lead wire) of the resistor 542. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 on the resistance 542 side of the line TL. The line TL may be set between the lower end of the main body of the resistor 542 and the upper end of the through hole 564.

The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (3) is set at a position below the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 (on the integrated circuit 560 side) and overlapping the main body of the resistor 542. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 on the resistance 542 side of the line TL.

The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (4) is set at a position separated from the lower end (BL) of the through hole 564 into which the lead wire on the lower side (integrated circuit 560 side) of the resistor 542 is inserted by a distance d. .. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 on the resistance 542 side of the line TL.

As shown in FIG. 62 (5), the game control board 510 may display the part number 548 on the resistance 542 side of the line TL so as to be in contact with the line TL. Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (6), the game control board 510 may display the part number 548 across the line TL.

Further, the line TL is a virtual line that can be recognized by parts mounted on the game control board 510, through holes, patterns, and silk printing (part number display, etc.), but silk printing on the game control board 510 ( It may be a solid line specified by a solid line, a broken line, etc.), or may be a solid line specified by printing, a sticker, or the like on the substrate box 520.

[Modified example of the third embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the modified example of the third embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the third embodiment, the component arrangement area and the non-component arrangement area are arranged between the integrated circuit and the connector on the substrate. The component placement area and the non-part placement area will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of a component arrangement area and a non-component arrangement area located between the integrated circuit and the connector on the game control board of the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of an AA cross section of the game control device of the modified example of the third embodiment.

The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 that houses the game control board 510 in the board box 520, and mounts an integrated circuit 560 and connectors 561, 562, 563 on the board mounting surface of the game control board 510.

The game control board 510 sets the component placement area 566 and the non-component placement area 565 side by side between the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, 563. The component placement area 566 is located on the integrated circuit 560 side, and the non-part placement area 565 is located on the connector 561, 562, 563 side. The part placement area 566 arranges the resistor 542, and the non-part placement area 565 displays the part number 548 corresponding to the resistance 542.

The integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542, and the resistor 542 and the connector 561 are electrically connected via a pattern 572 provided on the solder surface of the substrate 570. That is, the game control board 510 does not have a pattern for electrically connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542, and the resistor 542 and the connector 561 on the component mounting surface of the board 570.

The integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542 are housed in the substrate box 520 and protected from the outside. On the other hand, the connector 561 faces the outside from the opening 567 provided in the board box 520, and the required harness can be connected to the connector.

The board box 520 has a predetermined gap on various components for accommodating various components (for example, integrated circuit 560, resistor 542, etc.). On the other hand, the substrate box 520 is close to the game control substrate 510 in the vicinity of the opening 567. Therefore, the substrate box 520 has an upright wall 568 between the area for accommodating various parts (part arrangement area 566) and the opening 567. The upright wall 568 is within the non-part placement area 565.

Since the non-part arrangement area 565 includes the upright wall 568, the game control board 510 may have insufficient visibility of the part number display in the vicinity of the upright wall 568. Therefore, the game control board 510 displays the part numbers corresponding to the parts (for example, integrated circuit 560, resistor 542, etc.) in the range of the part arrangement area 566 in the range of the area 5651, and various connectors (for example, the connector 561 etc.). ) Is displayed in the range of the area 5653, and the part number display in the range of the area 5652 is restricted.

Here, the part number display of the modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. 65 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the part number display of the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the part number display of the modified example of the third embodiment.

In the part number display shown in FIG. 65 (1), the part number 573 corresponding to the resistor 542 is displayed in the range of the non-part placement area 565 in the same direction as the resistor 542, and the connector 561 is displayed in the range of the area 5653. The connector number 574 (part number) corresponding to is displayed in the same direction as the connector 561 (direction orthogonal to the resistor 542), and the part number display in the range of the area 5652 is hidden. As a result, the game machine 10 improves the ease of checking the parts and part numbers of the operator who performs the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

In the part number display shown in FIG. 65 (2), the part number 575 is displayed in the non-part arrangement area 565, and the part number 576 is displayed across the area 5651 and the area 5652. However, the part number 576 displays a number portion (number "15") having a large discriminating power in relation to the adjacent part number in the area 5651, and a character portion (character) having a small discriminating power in relation to the adjacent part number. “R”) is displayed in the area 5652, whereby the gaming machine 10 can secure a certain discriminating power of the part number 576 while sacrificing a part of the visibility of the part number 576. , The game machine 10 can improve the degree of freedom of the display position of other part numbers (for example, part number 575) by sacrificing a part of the visibility of the part number 576. 10 improves the ease of checking the parts and part numbers of the worker performing the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the game machine 10 can facilitate the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510.

FIG. 66 (1) is an enlarged view of a part (non-part arrangement area 565) of the AA cross section of the game control device shown in FIG. The substrate box 520 can be deformed by receiving an external force from the outside. At that time, the upright wall corner portion 580 of the board box 520 may come into contact with the game control board 510.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), the game control board 510 arranges the pattern 582 on the solder surface in the region 581 directly below the corner portion of the standing wall where the corner portion 580 of the standing wall can come into contact, avoiding the component mounting surface. As a result, the game control board 510 is prevented from malfunctioning due to a failure of the game control board 510 due to receiving an external force from the outside of the board box 520.

Further, in the game control board 510, when the pattern 583 cannot be arranged on the solder surface while avoiding the component mounting surface in the region 581 directly below the corner of the upright wall, that is, when the pattern 583 is arranged on the component mounting surface, the upright wall angle The part number 584 is displayed on the pattern 583 in the area 581 directly below the part. Since the part number 584 has a certain thickness by silk printing or the like, the pattern 583 can be protected.

As a result, the game control board 510 is prevented from malfunctioning due to a failure of the game control board 510 due to receiving an external force from the outside of the board box 520.
Although the game control board 510 has been described as an example of the third embodiment, the effect control board 511, various other control boards (for example, payout control board), the relay board (for example, the relay board 70), and the like. It can also be applied to other substrates (for example, LED substrates and sensor substrates).

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 is a control board (for example, a game) including an integrated circuit (for example, an integrated circuit 560) and a connector (for example, connectors 561, 562, 563) to which signals input / output of the integrated circuit can be connected. A control board 510) is provided. The control board is located in the connector side region located on the connector side among a plurality of passive elements (for example, resistors 541 and 542) mounted in the region between the integrated circuit and the connector (for example, in the component placement region 566). The direction of the passive element to be mounted is the first direction for connecting the integrated circuit and the connector (for example, the direction for connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, 563), and the passive element is mounted in the integrated circuit side region located on the integrated circuit side. The orientation of the passive element is set to the second orientation orthogonal to the first orientation (for example, the orientation orthogonal to the orientation connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, 563).

(2) The connector-side region of (1) is a region between the integrated circuit and the connector that is located closer to the connector than the predetermined line, and the integrated circuit-side region is located closer to the integrated circuit than the predetermined line. Area to do.

(3) The predetermined line of (2) is a line specified on the control board (for example, an actual line by silk printing or the like).
(4) The predetermined line of (2) is an unspecified line (for example, a virtual line recognizable from a mounting component or the like) on the control board.

(5) The game machine 10 has a control board (for example, a game) including an integrated circuit (for example, an integrated circuit 560) and a connector (for example, connectors 561, 562, 563) to which signals input / output of the integrated circuit can be connected. A control board 510) is provided. The control board mounts a passive element (for example, a resistor 542) in an integrated circuit side region (for example, component placement region 566) located on the integrated circuit side in the region between the integrated circuit and the connector, and mounts a passive element (for example, a resistor 542) on the connector side. Passive element information (for example, part number 548) regarding the passive element is displayed in the connector side region (for example, non-part arrangement area 565) where the passive element is located.

[Calculation and display of base]
Here, the calculation and display of the base as the gaming performance performed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. Here, the base is the ball output rate in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is a state that is neither a time saving state nor a big hit game state (big hit state), and more generally, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is a normal probability state (low probability). State) is a state. The ball payout rate is the number of balls paid out per 100 out balls. Therefore, when the number of out balls in the normal game state is Nout and the number of payout balls in the normal game state is Nsafe, the base B is calculated by the formula B = (Nsafe ÷ Nout) × 100. The number of out balls is the number of balls launched into the game area and entered the out port or the winning opening (for example, the number of balls counted based on the above-mentioned out ball detection switch signal), and is the number of out balls or simply. It may also be called out. Further, the number of payout balls is the number of prize balls paid out for winning, and may be referred to as the number of payout balls, the number of safe balls, or simply safe.

As described above in the description of FIG. 3, the game control device 100 of the game machine 10 is provided with a state display device 135. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a state display device 135 as a base display means and a storage area for the base, FIG. 67 (1) shows a display unit of the state display device 135, and FIG. 67 (2) is for the base. Indicates the storage area of. Further, FIG. 68 shows a display example by the state display device 135.

As shown in FIG. 67 (1), the status display device 135 is composed of four 4-digit 7-segment LEDs provided side by side, and a dot point (small circular light emission) is located at the lower right of each 7-segment LED. Part) is provided. Regarding the display of the base, of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, the 2 digits on the left side are identification segments that display the measurement time of the base (whether or not it is being measured and the order in which it was measured), and the 2 digits on the right side. Is a ratio segment that displays the base value. As shown in FIG. 68, the 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 actually displays "B" in the form of lowercase "b".

The game control device 100 (specifically, the CPU 111A, which is a control unit) sets a storage area for the base as shown in FIG. 67 (2) in the RWM such as the RAM 111C, and calculates the base and displays the base. use. That is, the game control device 100 sets a "out ball number" for storing the cumulative value of the out ball number and a "payout ball number" for storing the cumulative value of the payout ball number as the base calculation storage area. Further, as a base storage area for storing the calculated value of the base, "base (BL)", "base (B1)", "base (B2)", and "base (B3)" are set.

Here, the "base (BL)" is an area for storing the base being measured, the "base (B1)" is an area for storing the base measured one time before, and the "base (B2)" is 2. It is an area for storing the base measured three times before, and the "base (B3)" is an area for storing the base measured three times before. That is, it is an area for storing the oldest measured value (calculated value) of the base among the storage areas in which the "base (B3)" is set.

The above-mentioned storage area for base calculation and the storage value of the base storage area are backed up and stored when the power is turned off, and when the RAM is cleared (the power is turned on by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112) except for the abnormality of RWM. It is desirable to have a configuration that retains memory without clearing zero at times.

The game control device 100 uses the status display device 135 to display the probability setting setting contents (setting of any of the five stages) in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described above by the status display device 135. Display the base. In the first embodiment described above, the mode in which the setting contents of the probability setting are displayed by the probability setting value display device 136 has been described. However, the probability setting value display device 136 may be deleted so that the status display device 135 also functions as the probability setting value display device. In that case, the status display device 135 displays the above setting contents. It is performed in the mode, and in other cases, the base is displayed by the status display device 135.

The game control device 100 performs the calculation and display of the base as an example as follows. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 first blinks all the segments (including dot points) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

After that, the game control device 100 has a BL display state as shown in FIG. 68 (1), a B1 display state as shown in FIG. 68 (2), a B2 display state as shown in FIG. 68 (3), and FIG. 68 ( The operation of maintaining the B3 display state as shown in 4) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is repeatedly executed. That is, in the steady state after the power is turned on, the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B2 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B3 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then. The BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and so on, and the four states are switched in order and repeated.

Here, in the BL display state, the game control device 100 displays "bL" (BL) indicating that the measurement time of the base is being measured (this time) in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base" in the ratio segment. (BL) ”value (or“ --- ”) is displayed. Further, in the B1 display state, the game control device 100 displays "b1" (B1) indicating that the measurement time of the base is one time before in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base (B1)" in the ratio segment. "(Or" --- ") is displayed. Further, in the B2 display state, the game control device 100 displays "b2" (B2) indicating that the measurement time of the base is two times before in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base (B2)" in the ratio segment. "(Or" --- ") is displayed. Further, in the B3 display state, the game control device 100 displays "b3" (B3) indicating that the measurement time of the base is three times before in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base (B3)" in the ratio segment. "(Or" --- ") is displayed.

On the other hand, for the purpose of calculating the base, the game control device 100 is charged with the base calculation storage area "every time an out ball is detected (that is, every time an out ball detection switch signal is output) in the normal game state after activation. The memory value of "the number of out balls" is increased by the value corresponding to the number of detected out balls, and every time there is a prize in the winning opening of the game ball in the normal game state (or the prize ball is paid out based on the winning). Equivalent to the number of payout balls (or the number of actually paid out prize balls detected based on the signal from the payout control device 200) that generated the stored value of the "number of payout balls" in the base calculation storage area. Increase by the value you want. Further, the game control device 100 calculates the base B by the above-mentioned formula every time the stored value of the “out ball number” or the “paid ball number” in the base calculation storage area changes, and the calculation result is used as the base B. Overwrite the "base (BL)" of the base storage area as the latest value.

When the stored value of the "out ball number" in the base calculation storage area reaches the specified number of measurement (for example, 60,000), the game control device 100 assumes that one measurement is completed, and performs the following measurement. It is configured to perform processing at the end. In the processing at the end of this measurement, the value of the base storage area "base (B2)" at that time is overwritten on the base storage area "base (B3)", and the base storage area "base (B1)" at that time is overwritten. Overwrites the value of the base storage area "base (B2)", overwrites the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" at that time on the base storage area "base (B1)", and further. Clear the stored values of "number of out balls" and "number of payout balls" in the base calculation storage area and reset to zero. As a result, the base value up to 3 times before and the base value currently being measured are always stored and retained.

Then, in the game control device 100, the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" is a predetermined number of calculation start numbers (for example, the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" is zero) when the power is turned on for the first time. In the period A, which is less than 300 (predetermined number of less than 300), in each display state, characters indicating the base measurement time such as “bL”, “b1”, etc. are blinked in the identification segment, and in FIG. 68 (4) in the ratio segment. ) Is displayed as shown in () (a state in which only the horizontally long segment in the center is made to emit light) to notify that it is in an unmeasured state.

Next, when the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" reaches a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300), the game control device 100 shifts the base calculation storage area and the base storage area. Initialize (clear to zero) and start the first measurement.

Then, in the period B from the start of the first measurement until the stored value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" reaches the measured number (for example, 60,000), the game control device 100 is identified in the BL display state. Blinks or lights up "bL", and the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" is displayed in the ratio segment. In the period B, in other display states (B1 to B3 display states), characters indicating the base measurement time such as "b1" ... are displayed blinking in the identification segment, and "----" is displayed in the ratio segment. Notify that it is in an unmeasured state.

In the BL display state, the display of "bL" in the identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner when the stored value of the base calculation storage area "out number of balls" is less than the number of measurements, and the base calculation storage area "out" is displayed. When the stored value of "the number of balls" reaches the measured number, it is lit. Further, the blinking cycle of the blinking display in the identification segment and the ratio segment is, for example, 0.6 seconds, of which 0.3 seconds for lighting and 0.3 seconds for extinguishing. Further, when the stored value of the "out number of balls" reaches the number of measured pieces (for example, 60,000 pieces) and the period B ends, the above-mentioned processing at the end of the measurement is performed, and the next second measurement is started.

After that, the game control device 100 refers to the period B for performing the first measurement, the period C for performing the second measurement, the period D for performing the third measurement, the period E for performing the fourth measurement, and so on. The measurement is performed continuously as described above. Since the calculated values of the bases of the past three times are stored after the time when the third measurement is completed, the base measurement time such as "b1" in the identification segment is set in all the B1 to B3 display states. The indicated characters are lit and displayed, and the value of the corresponding base storage area (any of "base (B1)", "base (B2)", and "base (B3)") is displayed in the ratio segment.

Note that FIGS. 68 (1) to 68 (4) show an example of specific display in each display state in the above period D after the second measurement is completed. In this case, since there is no measurement result three times before, in FIG. 68 (4), which is a specific example of the B3 display state, the display of the ratio segment is "----" (display indicating the unmeasured state).

Further, in FIG. 68 (1), which is a specific example of the BL display state, the display of the ratio segment is “58”, indicating that the real-time base value currently being measured is 58. Further, in FIG. 68 (2), which is a specific example of the B1 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “67”, and the base value with respect to the specified number of measurements measured one time ago is 67. It is shown that. Further, in FIG. 68 (3), which is a specific example of the B2 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “49”, and the base value for the specified number of measurements measured two times before is 49. It is shown that. If the base value is 100 or more, the ratio segment is displayed as "99." (the number 99 is displayed in the ratio segment and the dot point of the last digit is lit), so that the ratio segment is 100 or more. Notify that.

Further, the base value generally has a normal range of, for example, about 25 to 35, and is abnormal even if it is smaller than this range or larger than this range, and this abnormality is called a base abnormality. The display example of FIG. 68 described above shows as an example a state in which the measurement results of the base abnormality exceeding the normal range are continuous, and in the normal case, the identification segment is a numerical value within the normal range of about 25 to 35. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 is, for example, the measured value of the base three times in the past (the above B1) stored in the base storage area (“base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, “base (B3)”). ~ B3 Display value of ratio segment in the display state) is out of the normal range and is abnormal, assuming that a base abnormality has occurred, an external signal indicating that a base abnormality has occurred is sent to an external, for example, amusement park internal management device. Send to (hall computer).

A signal (information) indicating this base abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a command, for example, and the effect control device 300 that receives this signal notifies the display area of the display device 41 of the base abnormality. An image (for example, an error notification image) may be displayed. In addition, since this base abnormality may occur when fraud is performed, it is desirable to set it to the above-mentioned strong error.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the measured value of the base is stored and displayed up to the past 3 times, but the number of the base storage areas is increased to store and display the past 4 times or more. It may be configured to be used. In addition, although the storage area for base calculation is set only for the one being measured, it is possible to provide a storage area for storing the number of out balls and the number of payout balls, which are the basis for calculating the past measured values. Good.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The game control device of the fourth embodiment includes a game control board that can be easily confirmed by visual inspection. Although the game control board will be described as an example of a board that can be easily confirmed by visual inspection, it can also be applied to other boards such as an effect control board, a payout control board, a power supply board, a relay board, a sensor board, and a lamp board. Is. First, the game control device of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the game control device of the fourth embodiment.

Like the game control device 100, the game control device 100a is supported by the front frame 12 via the mounting base 521 (see FIG. 48). The game control device 100a includes a board box 520 similar to the game control device 100 of the second embodiment, and houses a game control board 600 different from the game control device 100 of the second embodiment in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and has an engaging portion 522 on the long side on the upper side and a locking portion 523 on the opposite side on the lower side. The mounting base 521 has a substantially rectangular shape that is one size larger than the substrate box 520, includes engaged portions 522a and 522b corresponding to the engaging portion 522, and locked portion 523a corresponding to the locking portion 523. To be equipped.

The board box 520 first engages the engaging portion 522 and the engaged portions 522a and 522b, mounts the engaging portion 522 on the mounting base 521 with the engaging portion 522 as a rotation axis, and then mounts the locking portion 523. By locking to the locked portion 523a, it is fixed to the mounting base 521. The board box 520 has an upper member 5201 and a lower member 5202 as a main structure, and the game control board 600 is sandwiched and accommodated between the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 (see FIG. 49).

The caulking portion 524 (for example, a screw or the like) crimps the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202. The caulking unit 524 makes it possible to switch between the caulked state and the crimped state by a predetermined number of times, leaving a trace. Further, the substrate box 520 is provided with a sealing portion 525, and a sealing seal 525a is attached thereto, so that it is possible to detect whether or not the substrate box 520 has been opened depending on the state of the sealing seal 525a.

Further, the substrate box 520 has an information display sticker 603 attached to the upper member 5201. The information display sticker 603 displays required information such as a model name, a manufacturer name, a board management number, and a board box opening history. The information display sticker 603 may make it difficult to observe the game control board 600 directly underneath when viewed from the front, but the game control is performed by printing and displaying information on a transparent base material to change the observation angle. A blind spot does not occur in the observation of the substrate 600. It should be noted that ensuring the visibility of the information display sticker 603 also depends on not unnecessarily increasing the area of the information display sticker 603. Further, ensuring the visibility of the information display sticker 603 is also due to securing a gap between the information display sticker 603 and the game control board 600.

The game control board 600 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 600 is a two-layer board in which a conductor pattern is formed on the front surface and the back surface, the front surface is a component mounting surface, and the back surface is a solder surface. The game control board 600 is provided with screw holes 602 at each of the four corners, and is screwed into the lower member 5202 through the screw holes 602.

Further, the game control board 600 includes an information display area on at least one of a component mounting surface and a soldering surface. For example, the game control board 600 includes an information display area 601 on the component mounting surface. The information display area 601 is an area for displaying necessary information related to the game control board 600 such as a model name, a maker name, and a board management number.

The information display area 601 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the information display sticker 603 in front view. According to another viewpoint, the information display sticker 603 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the information display area 601 in the front view. That is, the game control device 100a arranges the information display area 601 and the information display sticker 603 at positions that do not overlap in the front view. As a result, the game machine 10 secures the visibility of the information display area 601 in a state where the game control device 100a is supported by the front frame 12. Since the information display area 601 displays information useful for confirming the game control board 600, the game machine 10 facilitates the confirmation of the information display area 601 to allow the game control board 600 or the game control device. The confirmation of 100a is facilitated.

Next, the front surface and the back surface of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 600 is provided with necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 600 includes connectors 530a, 530b, resistors 541, 542, processor 532, and the like shown in FIGS. 50 and 52 on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 70 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 600, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 600 has an information display area 601 (indicated by diagonal line hatching), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 604 (indicated by vertical line hatching) on its surface.

The information display area 601 displays control board information regarding the game control board 600. The information display area 601 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed so as to be isolated from the GND pattern 604, based on the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 601 is rectangular and is provided so that one side thereof is in contact with one side of the game control board 600. As a result, the game control board 600 prevents the GND pattern 604 from looping around the outer circumference of the information display area 601 and the arrangement of the information display area 601 as a noise source. The game control board 600 does not need to be provided with the information display area 601 in contact with one side of the game control board 600 as long as the noise due to the arrangement of the information display area 601 can be overlooked. That is, the game control board 600 may be surrounded by the GND pattern 604 to arrange the information display area 601. Further, the information display area 601 may have a shape not limited to a rectangle, and may have rounded corners, for example.

The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 601. The screw hole 602a is located in the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 600 is observed with the information display area 601 facing down. The screw hole 602a is provided in the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 604. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided so that the two sides of the lower left corner thereof are in contact with the two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 600. As a result, the game control board 600 prevents the GND pattern 604 from looping around the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a, and the arrangement of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a from becoming a noise source. If the noise due to the arrangement of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a can be overlooked, the game control board 600 is in contact with the two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 600 and is solid around the screw hole 602a. It is not necessary to provide a punch. That is, the game control board 600 may be surrounded by the GND pattern 604 to arrange a solid portion around the screw hole 602a. Further, the solid portion around the screw hole 602a may have a shape not limited to a rectangle, and for example, the corner portion may be rounded.

The GND pattern 604 is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 604 is provided on the peripheral edge of the information display area 601. As a result, the GND pattern 604 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 601 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 601 on the game control board 600. Further, the GND pattern 604 is provided on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the information display area 601 and the solid portion around the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 604 in between, the screw hole 602a also has a role of clarifying the location of the information display area 601 on the game control board 600. The shape and size of the GND pattern 604 shown in the figure is an example and is not limited to this. The GND pattern 604 may be more complicated or may have a size that extends over the entire substrate, as long as it is located on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around the information display area 601 and the screw hole 602a. ..

FIG. 70 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 600, that is, the solder surface. The game control board 600 has an information display back surface area 601a (indicated by a broken line), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 604a (indicated by vertical line hatching) on the back surface.

The information display back surface area 601a is an area corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 601. The screw hole 602a is located in the lower right corner when observing the back surface of the game control board 600 with the information display back surface area 601a (information display area 601) facing down. The GND pattern 604a includes an information display back surface region 601a. That is, the information display back surface region 601a is also a GND pattern (GND solid).

Next, the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the information display area of the fourth embodiment. First, FIG. 71 (1) describes an information display position in the information display area 601. The information display area 601 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 600 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 600 as a short side. The information display area 601 divides the short side of the width d1 into two with the width d2 on the end side of the game control board 600 and the width d3 on the inner side. In the information display area 601, the end side of the divided area is the information display unit 606a, and the internal side is the information non-display unit 606b. The width d2 and the width d3 may be the same or different.

The information display unit 606a has an information display pattern 605 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 605 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 600 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 605 displays the manufacturer (or the sales manufacturer) of the game control board 600.

The information non-display unit 606b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and has a function as a gap for suppressing the information display pattern 605 and the GND pattern 604 from approaching each other on the long side side of the information display area 601. As a result, the game control board 600 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 605. In such a game machine 10, it is easy to confirm the game control board 600.

Further, in the game control board 600, the information display pattern 605 serves as a noise source to reduce the influence on the GND pattern 604. From this point of view, it is desirable that the width d3 of the game control board 600 is made larger than the width d2 to set the information display unit 606a and the information non-display unit 606b.

Next, FIG. 71 (2) shows the details of the information display pattern 605. The information display pattern 605 is formed as a character string by the conductor pattern 605a, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 600 is "A Co., Ltd.". The conductor pattern 605a is independent of, that is, insulated from the GND pattern 604. Further, the conductor pattern 605a is independent of, that is, insulated from the GND pattern 604a. As a result, the conductor pattern 605a has a property of being a noise source, but its influence is limited by the information non-display unit 606b.

Next, FIG. 71 (3) shows a modified example of the information display pattern 605. The information display pattern 607 is formed as a character string by the conductor pattern 607a, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 600 is "Kou Co., Ltd.". The conductor pattern 607a is independent of, that is, insulated from the GND pattern 604.

On the other hand, the conductor pattern 607a has a via 607b and is electrically connected to the GND pattern 604a. Thereby, the conductor pattern 607a limits the properties that can be a noise source. The conductor pattern 607a is preferably provided with one or more vias 607b in all the independent conductor patterns, but may be limited to a part thereof.

Next, a first modification (modification example 1) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of an information display area of the first modification of the fourth embodiment. First, FIG. 72 (1) describes the information display area 611 included in the game control board 610. The game control board 610 is different from the game control board 600 of the fourth embodiment in that it has an information display area 611 instead of the information display area 601, and is the same in other respects.

The information display area 611 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 610 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 610 as a short side. The information display area 611 divides the short side of the width d4 into three parts by the width d5 on the inner side of the game control board 610, the width d7 on the end side, and the width d6 between them. The information display area 611 is an information display unit 615a, an information display unit 615b, and an information display unit 615c in order from the inside of the three-divided areas. The width d5, width d6, and width d7 may be the same or different.

The information display unit 615a has an information display pattern 612 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 612 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 610 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 612 displays the logo of the manufacturer (or the sales manufacturer) of the game control board 610. The information display unit 615a displays information by removing the conductor pattern based on the conductor pattern. Therefore, the information displayed by the information display unit 615a has an aspect of the punched pattern forming information formed by the punched pattern.

The information non-display unit 615b has an information display pattern 613 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 613 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 610 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 613 displays the name of the manufacturer (or the sales manufacturer) of the game control board 610. The information display unit 615b displays information by arranging a conductor pattern on a punching base that does not have a conductor pattern. Therefore, the information displayed by the information display unit 615b has an aspect of conductor pattern formation information formed by the conductor pattern.

The information non-display unit 615c has an information display pattern 614 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 614 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 610 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 614 displays the board management number of the game control board 610.

In the game control board 610, the back surfaces of the information display unit 615a, the information display unit 615b, and the information display unit 615c may be solid portions of the conductor pattern, or may be solid portions of the conductor pattern. Further, in the game control board 610, the back surfaces of the information display unit 615a, the information display unit 615b, and the information display unit 615c may be a combination of the solid portion and the solid portion of the conductor pattern. For example, in the game control board 610, the back surface of the information display unit 615a (the area corresponding to the information display unit 615a) is a solid part, and the back surface of the information display unit 615b (the area corresponding to the information display unit 615b) is a solid part. can do. As a result, the game control board 610 can have different observation modes (for example, a transmission observation mode described later) for each of the information display unit 615a, the information display unit 615b, and the information display unit 615c.

Next, FIG. 72 (2) shows the details of the information display pattern 612. The information display pattern 612 is formed as a logo by the conductor pattern 612a and the punching pattern 612b, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 610 is "Kou Co., Ltd." specified by the logo "KOH". The conductor pattern 612a is independent of, that is, insulated from the GND pattern 604. The conductor pattern 612a is composed of a flat conductor pattern surface that serves as a logo base. The punched pattern 612b is inside the logo base and does not have (pulls out) the conductor pattern, so that the logo is formed together with the conductor pattern 612a.

In this way, when different information is written side by side in the information display area 611, one piece of information is used as pattern formation information and the other piece of information is used as conductor pattern formation information. Thereby, the game control board 610 clarifies the division of two different information.

Next, FIG. 72 (3) shows a modified example of the information display pattern 612. The information display pattern 613 is formed as a logo by the conductor pattern 613a and the punching pattern 613b, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 610 is "Kou Co., Ltd." specified by the logo "KOH". The conductor pattern 613a is independent of, that is, insulated from the GND pattern 604.

On the other hand, the conductor pattern 613a has a via 613c and is electrically connected to the GND pattern 604a. Thereby, the conductor pattern 613a limits the properties that can be a noise source. The conductor pattern 613a is preferably provided with one or more vias 613c in all of the independent conductor patterns, but may be limited to a part thereof.

Next, a second modification (modification 2) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of an information display area of the second modification of the fourth embodiment. First, FIG. 73 (1) describes the information display area 622 and the GND pattern 621 included in the game control board 620. The game control board 620 has an information display area 622 instead of the information display area 601 and a GND pattern 621 instead of the GND pattern 604, as compared with the game control board 600 of the fourth embodiment. It differs from the point, and the same applies to the other points.

The information display area 622 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 620 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 620 as a short side. The short side of the information display area 622 is divided into two, the end side of the divided area is the information display unit 622a, and the internal side is the information non-display unit 622b.

The information display unit 622a has an information display pattern 623 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 623 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 620 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 623 displays the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 620.

The information non-display unit 622b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and has a function as a gap for suppressing the information display pattern 623 and the GND pattern 621 from coming close to each other on the long side side of the information display area 622. As a result, the game control board 620 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 623. In such a game machine 10, it is easy to confirm the game control board 620. Further, in the game control board 620, the information display pattern 623 serves as a noise source to reduce the influence on the GND pattern 621.

The GND pattern 621 includes an information display unit 621a. The information display unit 621a displays an information display pattern 625 that displays information by removing the conductor pattern based on the GND pattern 621 as a solid base. The information display pattern 625 displays necessary information about the game control board 620 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 625 displays the board management number of the game control board 620. Such an information display pattern 625 does not need to unnecessarily reduce the area of the GND pattern 621 on the game control board 620 while displaying necessary information about the game control board 620.

Further, in the game control board 620, when different information is written side by side, one of the information is used as the punched pattern forming information based on the GND pattern 621, and the other information is used as the conductor pattern forming information. Thereby, the game control board 620 clarifies the division of two different information.

The information display area 622 and the information display unit 621a may be arranged close to each other or separated from each other. Further, the information display area 622 may be configured so as not requiring the information non-display unit 622b when the information display area 622 and the information display unit 621a are arranged close to each other.

Next, FIG. 73 (2) describes the information display area 628 and the GND pattern 629 of the game control board 627. The game control board 620 has an information display area 628 instead of the information display area 601 and a GND pattern 629 instead of the GND pattern 604, as compared with the game control board 600 of the fourth embodiment. It differs from the point, and the same applies to the other points.

The information display area 628 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 627 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 627 as a short side. The information display area 628 includes an information display unit 628a.

The information display unit 628a has an information display pattern 623 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 623 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 627 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 623 displays the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 620.

The GND pattern 629 includes an information display unit 629a and an information non-display unit 629b. The information display unit 629a displays an information display pattern 625 that displays information by removing the conductor pattern based on the GND pattern 629 as a solid base. The information display pattern 625 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 627 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 625 displays the board management number of the game control board 627. Such an information display pattern 625 does not need to unnecessarily reduce the area of the GND pattern 629 on the game control board 627 while displaying necessary information about the game control board 627.

The information non-display unit 629b is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface, and is a gap for suppressing the information display pattern 623 and the information display pattern 625 from coming close to each other on the long side side of the information display area 628. Has a function as. As a result, the game control board 627 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 623 and the information display pattern 625. In such a game machine 10, it is easy to confirm the game control board 627.

Further, in the game control board 627, when different information is written side by side, one of the information is used as the punched pattern forming information based on the GND pattern 629, and the other information is used as the conductor pattern forming information. Thereby, the game control board 627 clarifies the division of two different information.

The information display area 628 and the information display unit 629a may be arranged close to each other or separated from each other. Further, the GND pattern 629 may have a configuration that does not require the information non-display unit 629b when the information display area 628 and the information display unit 629a are arranged close to each other.

Next, a third modification (modification 3) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of an information display area of the third modification of the fourth embodiment. The game control board 630 has a rectangular shape, and the information display area 632 is arranged in one of the four corners, for example, the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

The information display area 632 is a rectangle having a corner portion at the lower left corner of the game control board 630 and a long side and a short side. The information display area 632 includes the information display unit 632a and the information non-display unit 632b based on the solid removal portion on which the conductor pattern is not formed, and shares the same solid removal portion as the screw hole 602a.

The information display area 632 divides the short side of the width d1 into two with the width d2 on the end side of the game control board 630 and the width d3 on the inner side. In the information display area 632, the end side of the divided area is the information display unit 632a, and the internal side is the information non-display unit 632b. The width d2 and the width d3 may be the same or different.

The information display unit 632a has an information display pattern 634 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 634 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 630 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 634 displays the manufacturer (or the sales manufacturer) of the game control board 630. Since the information display unit 632a shares the same solid part as the screw hole 602a, the information display unit 632a can be easily found with reference to the screw hole 602a.

The information non-display unit 632b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and has a function as a gap for suppressing the information display pattern 634 and the GND pattern 631 from coming close to each other on the long side side of the information display area 632. As a result, the game control board 630 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 634. In such a game machine 10, it is easy to confirm the game control board 630. Further, in the game control board 630, the information display pattern 634 becomes a noise source and reduces the influence on the GND pattern 631. From such a viewpoint, it is desirable that the width d3 of the game control board 630 is made larger than the width d2 to set the information display unit 632a and the information non-display unit 632b.

Next, a fourth modification (modification example 4) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modified example 4 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 640 is provided with necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 640 includes connectors 530a, 530b, resistors 541, 542, processor 532, and the like shown in FIGS. 50 and 52 on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 75 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 640, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 640 has an information display area 641 (indicated by diagonal line hatching), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 642 (indicated by vertical line hatching) on its surface.

The information display area 641 displays control board information regarding the game control board 640. The information display area 641 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 642, based on the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 641 is rectangular and is provided with one side of the information display area 641 in contact with one side of the game control board 640.

The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 641. The screw hole 602a is located in the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 600 is observed with the information display area 641 facing downward. The screw hole 602a is provided in the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 642. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided so that the two sides of the lower left corner thereof are in contact with the two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 640.

The GND pattern 642 is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 642 is provided on the peripheral edge of the information display area 641. As a result, the GND pattern 642 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 641 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 641 on the game control board 640. Further, the GND pattern 642 is provided on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the information display area 641 and the solid portion around the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 642 in between, the screw hole 602a also has a role of clarifying the location of the information display area 641 on the game control board 640. The shape and size of the showed GND pattern 642 are merely examples and are not limited thereto. The GND pattern 642 may be more complicated or may be spread over the entire substrate as long as it is located on the periphery of the information display area 641 or the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a. ..

FIG. 75 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 640, that is, the solder surface. The game control board 640 has an information display back surface area 644 (indicated by white), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 643 (indicated by vertical line hatching) on the back surface.

The information display back surface area 644 is an area corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 641. The information display back surface region 644 is a solid portion having no conductor pattern. The game control board 640 makes it possible to partially transmit light in a region having no conductor pattern, and makes it impossible to transmit light in a region having a conductor pattern. This is because the base material constituting the game control board 640 allows a part of light to pass through, and the conductor pattern blocks the light.

Here, the appearance of the information display area 641 during observation will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of how the game control board of the modified example 4 of the fourth embodiment looks when observed.

The appearance of the normal observation of the game control board 640 is shown in FIG. 76 (1). The normal observation is an observation that relies on a light source that illuminates the surface of the game control board 640. The game control board 640 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 645 under a sufficient amount of light. On the other hand, the game control board 640 uses the positional relationship between the screw hole 602a and the information display area 641 and the contrast between the GND pattern 642 and the information display area 641 as clues even under an insufficient amount of light. In some cases, the position of the information display pattern 645 can be specified to obtain tentative visibility. However, the game control board 640 may not be able to obtain the visibility of the information display pattern 645 under an insufficient amount of light such as a game hall installation environment.

FIG. 76 (2) shows the appearance of the transmission observation of the game control board 640, which is useful when the light source that illuminates the surface of the game control board 640 cannot be relied on. The transmission observation is an observation that relies on the light source on the back surface side of the game control board 640, and brightens the base (extracted portion) of the information display area 641 to emphasize the contrast between the base of the information display area 641 and the conductor pattern. be able to. The game control board 640 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 645 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 640 by transmission observation.

As a result, the game control board 640 facilitates the position identification of the information display area 641. Further, the game control board 640 facilitates information observation in the information display area 641. Further, the game control board 640 enables information observation relying on the light leaking from the back surface side of the game machine 10 in a state where the outside light is not sufficient in the game hall installation environment. Further, the game control board 640 facilitates information observation relying on transmitted light not only in the game field installation environment of the game control board 640 but also in other work environments such as an assembly process and an inspection process.

The size, position, and shape of the information display area 641 and the information display back surface area 644 do not necessarily have to completely match. It is sufficient that the information display area 641 and the information display back surface area 644 overlap within a range in which transmission observation can be performed.

Next, a fifth modification (modification 5) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the information display area of the modified example 5 of the fourth embodiment. The game control board 650 has a rectangular shape, and information display areas 651 and 653 are arranged in one of the four corners, for example, the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

The information display area 651 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 650 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 650 as a short side. The information display area 653 is a rectangle in contact with the information display area 651, with one side along the long side of the information display area 651 as the long side. Therefore, the information display area 653 faces the end of the game control board 650 with the information display area 651 in between. In other words, the information display area 651 is located between the end of the game control board 650 and the information display area 653.

The information display area 651 includes an information display pattern 652 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern in a region based on the solid portion having no conductor pattern.

The information display area 653 is provided in the GND pattern 655. The information display area 653 is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface, and includes an information display pattern 654 formed by a print display (for example, silk printing or the like).

The information display pattern 652,654 displays necessary information about the game control board 650 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 652,654 displays the manufacturer (or even a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 650.

As described above, the game control board 650 displays the same information in different forms by the information display patterns 652 and 654. Therefore, the game control board 650 may be expected to have sufficient visibility of one of the information display patterns 652 and 654 even if the visibility of the other is not sufficient. Further, in the game control board 650, even when the visibility of both the information display patterns 652 and 654 is not sufficient, sufficient visibility may be expected by mutual complementation. For example, the game control board 650 can visually recognize the information display pattern 654 formed by silk printing even when the information display pattern 652 formed by the conductor pattern cannot be visually recognized due to insufficient light amount or light reflection. You may be able to do it. On the contrary, the game control board 650 has an information display pattern formed by the conductor pattern even when the information display pattern 654 formed by silk printing cannot be visually recognized due to an insufficient amount of light or light reflection. It may be possible to see 652. In this way, the game control board 650 can display information corresponding to a wider observation condition by arranging information display patterns 652 and 654 having different observation performances in parallel.

Further, as described in the modified example 4, the game control board 650 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 652 by transparent observation by removing the back surface of the information display area 651 from solid. In the game control board 650, although the information display patterns 652 and 654 display the same information in different forms, different information may be displayed. For example, the game control board 650 displays the logo of the manufacturer of the game control board 650 in the information display area 653 by silk printing, and displays the manufacturer name of the game control board 650 in the information display area 651 in a conductor pattern. There may be.

Next, a sixth modification (modification 6) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of how the game control board of the sixth modification of the fourth embodiment looks when observed. The appearance of the normal observation of the game control board 660 is shown in FIG. 78 (1). The game control board 660 has a rectangular shape, and the information display areas 661 and 663 are arranged in one of the four corners, for example, the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

The information display area 661 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 660 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 660 as a short side. The information display area 663 is a rectangle in contact with the information display area 661, with one side along the long side of the information display area 661 as the long side. Therefore, the information display area 663 faces the end of the game control board 660 with the information display area 661 in between. In other words, the information display area 661 is located between the end of the game control board 660 and the information display area 663.

The information display area 661 includes an information display pattern 662 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern in a region based on the solid portion having no conductor pattern. The information display area 663 includes an information display pattern 664 formed by printing display (for example, silk printing or the like) in a region based on a solid portion having no conductor pattern.

The information display pattern 662,664 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 660 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 662,664 displays the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 660.

The normal observation of the game control board 660 is an observation that relies on a light source that illuminates the surface of the game control board 660. The game control board 660 can obtain good visibility of the information display patterns 662 and 664 under a sufficient amount of light. Further, the game control board 660 displays the same information in different forms by the information display patterns 662 and 664. Therefore, the game control board 660 may be expected to have sufficient visibility of one of the information display patterns 662 and 664 even if the visibility of the other is not sufficient. Further, in the game control board 660, even when the visibility of both the information display patterns 662 and 664 is not sufficient, sufficient visibility may be expected by mutual complementation. For example, the game control board 660 can visually recognize the information display pattern 664 formed by silk printing even when the information display pattern 662 formed by the conductor pattern cannot be visually recognized due to insufficient light amount or light reflection. You may be able to do it. On the contrary, the game control board 660 has an information display pattern formed by the conductor pattern even when the information display pattern 664 formed by silk printing cannot be visually recognized due to an insufficient amount of light or light reflection. It may be possible to see 662 visually. As described above, the game control board 660 can display information corresponding to a wider observation condition by arranging the information display patterns 662 and 664 having different observation performances in parallel.

On the other hand, in the game control board 660, the positional relationship between the screw holes 602a and the information display areas 661,663, the contrast between the GND pattern 665 and the information display areas 661,663, etc., even under an insufficient amount of light, etc. It may be possible to specify the positions of the information display patterns 662 and 664 and obtain tentative visibility by using the above as a clue. However, the game control board 660 may not be able to obtain the visibility of the information display patterns 662 and 664 under an insufficient amount of light such as a game hall installation environment.

However, in the game control board 660, the back surface of the information display area 661 is made solid and the back surface of the information display area 663 is made solid as described in the modified example 4. FIG. 78 (2) shows how the transmission observation of the game control board 640 looks like this.

The transmission observation is an observation that relies on the light source on the back surface side of the game control board 660, and brightens the base (extracted portion) of the information display area 661 to emphasize the contrast between the base of the information display area 661 and the conductor pattern. be able to. The game control board 660 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 662 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by transmission observation.

Since the back surface of the information display area 663 of the game control board 660 is solid GND, transmitted light cannot be observed in the information display area 663. Therefore, the game control board 660 cannot be expected to have good visibility of the information display pattern 664 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by transmission observation. However, the game control board 660 can limit the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by the GND solid on the back surface of the information display area 663. Therefore, the game control board 660 can obtain better visibility of the information display pattern 664 in normal observation as compared with the case where the back surface of the information display area 663 is not solid.

As a result, the game control board 660 facilitates the position identification of the information display area 661. Further, the game control board 660 facilitates information observation in the information display area 661. Further, the game control board 660 enables information observation relying on the light leaking from the back surface side of the game machine 10 in a state where the outside light is insufficient in the game hall installation environment. Further, the game control board 660 facilitates information observation relying on transmitted light not only in the game field installation environment of the game control board 660 but also in other work environments such as an assembly process and an inspection process.

It should be noted that the size, position, and shape of the information display area 661 and the solid portion on the back surface thereof do not necessarily have to completely match. It suffices if the information display area 661 and the solid portion on the back surface thereof overlap within a range in which transmission observation can be performed.

Next, a seventh modification (modification example 7) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modified example 7 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 670 is provided with necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 670 includes connectors 530a, 530b, resistors 541, 542, processor 532, and the like shown in FIGS. 50 and 52 on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 79 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 670, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 670 has an information display area 671 (indicated by diagonal line hatching), screw holes 602a, 602b, and a GND pattern 672 (indicated by vertical line hatching) on its surface.

The information display area 671 displays control board information regarding the game control board 670. The information display area 671 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed so as to be isolated from the GND pattern 672, based on the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 671 is rectangular and is provided with one side of the information display area 671 in contact with one side of the game control board 670. The information display area 671 is located at the lower left when observing the surface of the game control board 670 with one side in contact with the game control board 670 facing down.

The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 671. The screw hole 602a is located in the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 670 is observed with the information display area 671 facing downward. The screw hole 602a is provided in the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 672. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided so that the two sides of the lower left corner thereof are in contact with the two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 670.

The screw hole 602b is one of the screw holes 602 and is located away from the information display area 671. The screw hole 602b is located in the lower right corner when the surface of the game control board 670 is observed with the information display area 671 facing downward.

The GND pattern 672 is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 672 is provided on the peripheral edge of the information display area 671. As a result, the GND pattern 672 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 671 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 671 on the game control board 670. Further, the GND pattern 672 is provided on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the information display area 671 and the solid portion around the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 672 in between, the screw hole 602a also has a role of clarifying the location of the information display area 671 on the game control board 670.

FIG. 79 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 670, that is, the solder surface. The game control board 670 has an information display area 673 (indicated by diagonal line hatching), screw holes 602a and 602b, and a GND pattern 674 (indicated by vertical line hatching) on the back surface.

The information display area 673 also displays the control board information regarding the game control board 670, similarly to the information display area 671. The information display area 673 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed so as to be isolated from the GND pattern 674, based on the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 673 is rectangular and is provided with one side of the information display area 673 in contact with one side of the game control board 670. The information display area 673 is also located at the lower left when the back surface of the game control board 670 is observed with one side in contact with the game control board 670 facing down, similarly to the information display area 671.

In this way, when the information display area 671 is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the front surface (component mounting surface) of the game control board 670, the information display area 673 is the back surface (solder surface) of the game control board 670. ) Is located at a predetermined position (lower left). That is, the game control board 670 arranges the information display area 673 on the back surface in the same positional relationship as the information display area 671 on the front surface.

Next, an eighth modification (deformation example 8) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. First, the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modified example 8 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modified example 8 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 680 is provided with necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 680 includes connectors 530a, 530b, resistors 541, 542, processor 532, and the like shown in FIGS. 50 and 52 on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 80 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 680, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 680 has an information display area 681 (indicated by diagonal line hatching), screw holes 602a, 602b, and a GND pattern 682 (indicated by vertical line hatching) on its surface.

The information display area 681 displays control board information regarding the game control board 680. The information display area 681 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed so as to be isolated from the GND pattern 682, based on the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 681 is rectangular and is provided with one side of the information display area 681 in contact with one side of the game control board 680. The information display area 681 is located at the lower left when observing the surface of the game control board 680 with one side in contact with the game control board 680 facing down.

The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 681. The screw hole 602a is located in the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 680 is observed with the information display area 681 facing down. The screw hole 602a is provided in the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 682. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided so that the two sides of the lower left corner thereof are in contact with the two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 680.

The screw hole 602b is one of the screw holes 602 and is located away from the information display area 681. The screw hole 602b is located in the lower right corner when the surface of the game control board 680 is observed with the information display area 681 facing down.

The GND pattern 682 is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 682 is provided on the peripheral edge of the information display area 681. As a result, the GND pattern 682 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 681 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 681 on the game control board 680. Further, the GND pattern 682 is provided on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the information display area 681 and the solid portion around the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 682 interposed therebetween, the screw hole 602a also has a role of clarifying the location of the information display area 681 on the game control board 680.

FIG. 80 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 680, that is, the solder surface. The game control board 680 has an information display area 683 (indicated by diagonal line hatching), screw holes 602a and 602b, and a GND pattern 684 (indicated by vertical line hatching) on the back surface.

The information display area 683 also displays the control board information regarding the game control board 680, similarly to the information display area 681. The information display area 683 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 684, based on the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 683 is rectangular and is provided with one side of the information display area 683 in contact with one side of the game control board 680. The information display area 683 is a position corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 681, and is located at the lower right when the back surface of the game control board 680 is observed with one side in contact with the game control board 680 facing down.

In this way, when the information display area 681 is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the front surface (component mounting surface) of the game control board 680, the information display area 683 is the back surface (solder surface) of the game control board 680. ), Which is arranged at a position (lower right) corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 681. That is, the game control board 680 arranges the information display area 683 on the back surface in a positional relationship corresponding to the information display area 681 on the front surface.

Next, the information display areas 681 and 683 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of an information display area of the modified example 8 of the fourth embodiment. First, FIG. 81 (1) describes an information display position in the information display area 681. The information display area 681 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 680 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 680 as a short side. The short side of the information display area 681 is divided into two, the end side of the divided area is the information display unit 681a, and the internal side is the information non-display unit 681b. The width of the short side divided into two may be the same or different.

The information display unit 681a has an information display pattern 685 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 685 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 680 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 685 displays the manufacturer (or even a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 680.

The information non-display unit 681b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and has a function as a gap for suppressing the information display pattern 685 and the GND pattern 682 from coming close to each other on the long side side of the information display area 681. As a result, the game control board 680 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 685. In such a game machine 10, it is easy to confirm the game control board 680.

Next, FIG. 81 (2) describes the information display position in the information display area 683. The information display area 683 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 680 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 680 as a short side. The short side of the information display area 683 is divided into two, the inner side of the divided area is the information display unit 683a, and the end side is the information non-display unit 683b. That is, the back surface of the information display unit 681a is the information non-display unit 683b, and the back surface of the information display unit 683a is the information non-display unit 681b. The width of the short side divided into two may be the same or different.

The information display unit 683a has an information display pattern 686 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 686 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 680 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 686 displays the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 680.

The information non-display portion 683b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and serves as a gap for suppressing the information display pattern 686 and the end portion of the game control board 680 from approaching each other on the long side side of the information display region 681. Has a function. As a result, the game control board 680 facilitates the position identification of the information display pattern 686 using the information non-display unit 683b as a clue. Such position identification is useful because the back surface of the game control board 680 is not a component mounting surface, and the game machine 10 can easily confirm the game control board 680.

Next, the appearance of the information display areas 681 and 683 during transmission observation will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of how the game control board of the modified example 8 of the fourth embodiment looks when observed.

The appearance of the transmission observation of the game control board 680 which is useful when the light source which irradiates the surface of the game control board 680 cannot be relied on is shown. The transmission observation is an observation that relies on the light source on the back surface side of the game control board 680, and brightens the base (extracted portion) of the information display area 681,683 to make the base of the information display area 681,683 and the GND pattern. The contrast with the conductor patterns of 682,684 and the information display patterns 685,686 can be emphasized. The game control board 680 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 685 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 680 by observing the transmission from the surface. Further, the game control board 680 reversely displays the information display pattern 686 by observing the transmission from the surface, and the existence and position of the information display pattern 686 can be indicated from the surface.

The game control board 680 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 686 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 680 by observing the transmission from the back surface. Further, the game control board 680 reversely displays the information display pattern 685 by transparent observation from the back surface, and the existence and position of the information display pattern 685 can be indicated from the back surface.

As a result, the game control board 680 facilitates the position identification of the information display areas 681 and 683. Further, the game control board 680 facilitates information observation in the information display areas 681 and 683. Further, the game control board 680 enables information observation relying on the light leaking from the back surface side of the game machine 10 in a state where the outside light is not sufficient in the game hall installation environment. Further, the game control board 680 facilitates information observation relying on transmitted light not only in the game field installation environment of the game control board 640 but also in other work environments such as an assembly process and an inspection process.

The size, position, and shape of the information display areas 681 and 683 do not necessarily have to be exactly the same. It suffices if the information display areas 681 and 683 overlap in a range where transmission observation can be performed. Further, the information displayed by the information display patterns 685 and 686 does not necessarily have to be the same information, but may be different information. Further, it is desirable that the information display patterns 685 and 686 do not overlap during transmission observation, but some of them may overlap because their existence can be easily grasped.

Next, a ninth modification (modification example 9) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modified example 9 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 690 is provided with necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 690 includes connectors 530a, 530b, resistors 541, 542, processor 532, and the like shown in FIGS. 50 and 52 on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 83 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 690, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 690 has a surface mount area 691 (indicated by diagonal hatching) on its surface. The surface mount area 691 is an area for mounting a surface mount component on the surface of the game control board 690. Surface mount components include, for example, IC packages such as SOP (Small Outline Package) and QFP (Quad Flat Package), chip resistors, chip capacitors, and connectors.

The surface mount area 691 is rectangular and is provided so that one side thereof is in contact with one side of the game control board 690. The surface mount area 691 is located at the lower left when the surface of the game control board 690 is observed with one side in contact with the game control board 690 facing down. The surface mount area 691 may be provided without being in contact with one side of the game control board 690.

FIG. 83 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 690, that is, the solder surface. The game control board 690 has an information display area 692 (indicated by diagonal line hatching) and a GND pattern 693 (indicated by vertical line hatching) on the back surface. Since the surface mount area 691 of the game control board 690 does not have through holes, the information display area 692 can be arranged on the back surface of the surface mount area 691 without being hindered by the through holes.

The information display area 692 displays the control board information regarding the game control board 690. The information display area 692 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed so as to be isolated from the GND pattern 693, based on the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 692 is rectangular and is provided with one side of the information display area 692 in contact with one side of the game control board 690. The information display area 692 is a position corresponding to the back surface of the surface mount area 691, and is located at the lower right when the back surface of the game control board 690 is observed with one side in contact with the game control board 690 facing down.

In this way, when the surface mount area 691 is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the surface (component mounting surface) of the game control board 690, the information display area 692 is the back surface (solder surface) of the game control board 690. ), Which is arranged at a position (lower right) corresponding to the back surface of the surface mount area 691. That is, the game control board 690 arranges the information display area 692 on the back surface in a positional relationship corresponding to the surface mount area 691 on the front surface.

The game control board 690 may have surface mount components mounted on the surface mount region 691 during non-mass production and may not mount surface mount components in the surface mount region 691 during mass production. Non-mass production does not mean mass production, but, for example, development or pre-mass production inspection. The game control board 690 surface mounts a surface mount component (for example, a driver IC) for outputting an inspection signal at the time of development or inspection in the surface mount area 691. Further, the game control board 690 does not surface mount the surface mount component in the surface mount region 691 at the time of mass production, that is, during operation in the market. As a result, the game machine 10 reduces the manufacturing cost of the game control board 690 and suppresses fraudulent acts based on the acquisition of the inspection signal. Further, the game control board 690 can facilitate the transmission observation of the information display area 692 when the surface mount area 691 is made into a solid portion by not surface-mounting the surface mount component on the surface mount area 691. ..

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) In the game machine 10, a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604, 604a) is formed on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 600) capable of forming a display pattern 605) is provided. The control board is provided with a solid conductor pattern (for example, information display area 601) in a predetermined area on the first surface, and an information display unit (for example, information display unit 606a) for displaying control board information related to the control board. Is formed by a conductor pattern (for example, information display pattern 605) independent of the peripheral conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604), and a solid portion (for example) of the conductor pattern is formed at a position corresponding to the information display portion on the second surface. For example, the GND pattern 604a and the information display back surface area 601a) are provided (see FIGS. 70 and 71).

(2) The solid part of (1) has one side as the end of the control board, is in contact with the conductor pattern on the periphery on the other side, and displays information closer to the end of the control board than the conductor pattern on the periphery. The part is arranged (see FIG. 71 (1)).

(3) The control board information (for example, conductor pattern 607a) of (1) or (2) is the solid portion of the conductor pattern provided on the second surface (for example, GND pattern 604a, information display back surface area 601a). Electrically connected by vias (eg, vias 607b) (see FIG. 71 (3)).

(4) The game machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 642, 643) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board that can be formed (for example, a game control board 640) is provided. The control board is provided with a solid conductor pattern (for example, an information display area 641) in a predetermined area on the first surface, and an information display part for displaying control board information related to the control board is provided with a conductor pattern (for example, a peripheral conductor pattern). It is formed by a conductor pattern (for example, information display pattern 645) independent of the GND pattern 642), and a solid portion (for example, information display back surface area 644) of the conductor pattern is formed at a position corresponding to the information display portion on the second surface. ) (See FIGS. 75 and 76).

(5) The information display portion of (4) is formed by a conductor pattern (for example, information display pattern 645) independent of the peripheral conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 642) (see FIG. 76 (1)).

(6) The game machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 682,684) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board that can be formed (for example, a game control board 680) is provided. The control board is provided with a solid conductor pattern solid portion in a predetermined area on the first surface (for example, a lower left corner when the game control board 680 is oriented in a predetermined direction and observed from the surface), and control board information regarding the control board. A first information display unit (for example, information display area 681) for displaying is formed by a conductor pattern, and a position (for example, a game control board 680) on the second surface corresponding to the first information display unit is defined. A solid conductor pattern is provided on the back side of the lower left corner when viewed from the front surface in the orientation direction, that is, the lower right corner portion when the game control board 680 is viewed from the back surface in a predetermined orientation to control the control board. A second information display unit (for example, information display area 683) for displaying substrate information is formed by a conductor pattern (see FIG. 80).

(7) The game machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 672, 674) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board that can be formed (for example, a game control board 670) is provided. The control board is provided with a solid conductor pattern solid portion in a predetermined region of the first surface (for example, a lower left corner when the game control board 670 is oriented in a predetermined direction and observed from the surface), and control board information regarding the control board. A first information display unit (for example, information display area 671) for displaying is formed by a conductor pattern, and a position (for example, a game control board 670) on the second surface corresponding to the first information display unit is defined. A solid part of the conductor pattern is provided in the lower left corner when viewed from the back surface in the orientation direction, and a second information display unit (for example, information display area 673) for displaying control board information related to the control board is provided with a conductor pattern. (See FIG. 79).

(8) The game machine 10 can form a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 693) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 690) is provided. The control board is provided with a predetermined surface mount component (for example, IC package (SOP)) mounted on the first surface during non-mass production and a predetermined area (for example, surface mount area 691) on which the surface mount component is not mounted during mass production. An information display unit (for example, information display area 692) for displaying control board information related to the control board is placed on a second surface at a position corresponding to a predetermined area (for example, the back side of the surface mount area 691) by a conductor pattern. It is formed and provided (see FIG. 83).

(9) In the game machine 10, a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604, information display pattern) is formed on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 610) capable of forming 612,613,614) is provided. The control board adjacently accommodates the first control board information (for example, the information displayed on the information display unit 615a) and the second control board information (for example, the information displayed on the information display unit 615b) regarding the control board. When displaying, either one of the first control board information and the second control board information is displayed by a conductor pattern (for example, information display pattern 613) formed in a solid portion of the conductor pattern, and the other is a conductor. It is displayed by a punched pattern (for example, information display pattern 612) formed in a solid portion of the pattern (see FIG. 72).

(10) When the first control board information and the second control board information of (9) are displayed on the first surface, it is the second surface and the first control board information and the second control board are displayed. The region corresponding to one of the information is defined as the solid portion of the conductor pattern, and the region corresponding to the other is defined as the solid portion of the conductor pattern (see FIGS. 72 and 78).

(11) The first control board information and the second control board information of (9) or (10) are both conductor patterns (for example, information display patterns) independent of the peripheral conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604). 612,613) (see FIG. 72).

(12) In the game machine 10, a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 621, information display pattern) is formed on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 620) capable of forming 623) is provided. The control board has a punching pattern in which an information display unit for displaying control board information related to the control board is formed on a ground solid (for example, GND pattern 604) of at least one of a first surface and a second surface. (For example, the information display pattern 625) is displayed (see FIG. 73).

(13) In the game machine 10, a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 655, information display pattern) is formed on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 650) capable of forming 652) is provided. The control board includes a first information display unit (for example, an information display pattern 652) that displays control board information related to the control board in a first form (for example, a conductor pattern), and a control board information in the first form. It includes a second information display unit (eg, information display pattern 654) that is displayed in a different second form (eg, silk printing) (see FIG. 77).

(14) The first information display unit and the second information display unit of (13) are arranged in parallel (see FIG. 77).
The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program that describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices, optical disks, optical magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical disks include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

When a program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM on which the program is recorded is sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. In addition, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the above-mentioned gaming balls and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (2)

The first surface and comprising a group capable of forming plate second surface and the conductor pattern serving as the rear surface side of the first surface,
Before Kimoto plate,
An information display region formed by removing the solid color of the conductor pattern is provided in a predetermined region of the first surface, and the information display region includes a first region having a size capable of displaying at least substrate information related to the substrate. It is divided into a second region, the first region is formed as an information display unit for displaying the substrate information by the conductor pattern , and the second region is formed as an information non-display unit without the conductor pattern.
A solid part of the conductor pattern is provided at a position corresponding to the information display area on the second surface.
Game machine. The second region is larger than the first region.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images